You are on page 1of 568

Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


VCADS Pro, Operations 300 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

VCADS Pro, Operations


The following VCADS Pro operations are available for function group 3. Operations used when changing or working on
components are mandatory.
Tests

Operation Application
30101-3 Sensor values Vehicle control unit Used when there is a suspicion of fault and/or at abnormal values/readings.
(VECU, MID187), check
30902-3 Keypad status, test Used when there is a suspicion of fault and/or at abnormal values/readings.
36003-3 Switches, control levers, test Used when there is a suspicion of fault and/or at abnormal values/readings.
36401-3 Switches, test Used when there is a suspicion of fault and/or at abnormal values/readings.
37173-3 Data links, fault tracing with Used when there is a suspicion of fault and/or at abnormal values/readings.
oscilloscope
38674-3 Pressure switches, test Used when there is a suspicion of fault and/or at abnormal values/readings.
39796-3 MID 142 Control unit, reset Used when it is transferred to another machine.
39797-3 Care Track status, check Used when there is a suspicion of fault and/or at abnormal values/readings.

Calibrations

Operation Application
– –

Programming

Operation Application
36646-3 MID 187 ECU, programming When changing V-ECU or only reprogramming. See
366 V-ECU, MID 187, changing non-programmed ECU
36648-3 MID 187 ECU, campaign
38145-3 MID 140 ECU, programming When changing I-ECU or only reprogramming. See
300 I-ECU, MID 140, changing non-programmed ECU
38104-3 MID 140 ECU, campaign
39736-3 MID 142 Control unit, programming When changing W-ECU or only reprogramming. See
398 W-ECU, MID142, changing non-programmed ECU
39738-3 MID 142 Control unit, campaign
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


I-ECU, MID 140, changing 300 Service Information 2014/6/12
non-programmed ECU
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

I-ECU, MID 140, changing non-programmed ECU


Op nbr 300-072

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Download the program for target machine.

3. Connect VCADS Pro computer to the machine, and perform operation '38145-3 MID 140 control unit,
programming'.

4. When VCADS pro 'MID 140 ECU, programming' window appears, follow the instructions for replacing I-ECU.

5. Turn OFF battery disconnect switch.

6. Open the windscreen.

7. Remove the screws of plastic cover and disconnect the wire harness from the cab wire harness.

8. Remove the screws fixing I-ECU to the cab.

Figure 1
I-ECU, changing

1. Screw
2. Wire harness

9. Install a new I-ECU to the cab with screws and connect wire harness.

10. Install the plastic cover with screws and close the windscreen.

11. After replacing the I-ECU, press OK button of VCADS Pro operation '38145–3 MID 140 control unit, programming'.
Now VCADs Pro starts the programming of software and parameters to the new I-ECU.
12. Start the machine and check that no error messages appear.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


I-ECU, MID 140, changing 300 Service Information 2014/6/12
pre-programmed ECU
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

I-ECU, MID 140, changing pre-programmed ECU


Op nbr 300-074

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Connect VCADS Pro computer to the machine, and perform operation '17030-3 Parameter, programming'.

3. Use the function 'save all parameters to job card'.

4. Turn OFF battery disconnect switch.

5. Open the windscreen.

6. Remove the screws of plastic cover and disconnect the wire harness from the cab wire harness.

7. Remove the screws of fixing I-ECU to the cab.

Figure 1
I-ECU, changing

1. Screw
2. Wire harness

8. Install a new I-ECU to the cab with screws and connect wire harness.

9. Install the plastic cover with screws and close the windscreen.

10. Connect VCADS Pro computer to the machine, and perform operation 17030-3 Parameter, programming'. Now the
customer parameters are changed according to the job card saved at step 3.

11. Start the machine and check that no error messages appear.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Electrical system, Service Information 2014/6/12
description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Electrical system, description


This section of the service manual describes the design and construction of the electrical system and all included
components. This section also contains functional descriptions, troubleshooting and method instructions for servicing.
The electrical system consists, in part, of electrical and electro-mechanical components such as batteries, switches, solenoid
valves, fuses and relays. The electrical system also consists of a computer-based control system that monitors and controls
machine functions.
In order to access certain settings in the information system, special service instruments are required; VCADS Pro. User
instruction for VCADS Pro is available in a separate user’s manual.

WARNING
For all servicing of the electrical system, the general instructions must be strictly followed.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Electrical system, special Service Information 2014/6/12
instructions for servicing,
general
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Electrical system, special instructions for servicing, general


WARNING
No changes may be made to the electrical system without prior approval from Volvo. Changes may affect machine
functions and can result in risks for personal injury or machine damage.

WARNING
Carelessness when working with the electrical system may result in risks of serious personal injuries as well as
machine damage.

When working on the electrical system, the following instructions as well as instructions in respective section must
be followed carefully.

Also read instructions in Section Safety and in the Operator's Manual.

WARNING
Always remove watches, rings, bracelets and other metallic objects from the body before starting to work on the
electrical system.

Figure 1

WARNING
Never boost-start the machine by connecting directly to the starter motor. This may result in uncontrolled machine
movements. When using another machine to boost-start, it must not touch the machine that is being started.

Never test if a cable/connection is supplied with electric power by producing "spark". This may permanently damaged
electrical/electronic components.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Electrical system, special Service Information 2014/6/12
instructions for servicing,
electrical components,
batteries
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Electrical system, special instructions for servicing, electrical


components, batteries
WARNING
During rapid charging of batteries, always remove the cell caps. During charging, an explosive mixture of oxygen
and hydrogen is formed. A short-circuit, open flame or spark near the battery can cause a powerful explosion.
Always turn off the charging current before disconnecting the charging clamps. Ventilate well, especially if the
battery is being charged in a confined area.

The battery electrolyte contains corrosive sulphuric acid. Remove spilled electrolyte from the skin immediately.
Wash with soap and plenty of water. If electrolyte has splashed into the eyes or on any other sensitive body part,
rinse immediately with plenty of water and contact a physician immediately.

WARNING
The batteries could explode due to the current surge if a fully charged battery is connected to a completely
discharged battery. Since the batteries contain sulphuric acid, this could result in personal injuries.

WARNING
Never charge a frozen battery. Explosion hazard!

 Never disconnect the main electric current or disconnect battery cables when the engine is running.

Figure 1

 The battery's minus connection must always be disconnected before removing or installing components and
connections in the electrical system.
NOTE!
Incorrect handling may cause damage to, for example, control unit/ECU which results in downtime.

Figure 2

 Fully charged batteries must be used when checking the electrical system. If the batteries are not fully charged,
charge them or replace with new batteries.
 During battery charging, the battery terminal cables must always be disconnected from the battery.
 When changing batteries connected in series, the batteries should have the same capacity (for example, 150 Ah).
The batteries should be of the same age (equally good).
The reason for this is that the charging current required to give the battery a certain charge varies with the age of
the battery.
 Only batteries may be used as assistant starting devices.
An auxiliary starter unit and/or batteries connected in series to assist when starting may result in high (excess)
voltage and can seriously damage electronic/electric components.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Electrical system, special Service Information 2014/6/12
instructions for servicing,
electrical components,
alternator and charging
regulator
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Electrical system, special instructions for servicing, electrical


components, alternator and charging regulator
 Before any alternator or regulator tests are performed, the batteries and electrical cabling must be checked for
insulation, loose connections and corrosion. Check the alternator belts. All eventual defects according to the above
must be corrected before starting any electrical testing.
 Check the alternator belt and, if needed, make any necessary adjustment/repairs before troubleshooting.

NOTICE
Always connect cabling in a safe manner and make sure that cables are free from rust/dirt. A disconnected
cable may cause damage to both alternator and charging regulator.

NOTICE
Never disconnect the alternator connections when the engine is running. This may damage both alternator
and charging regulator.

NOTICE
Make sure that the alternator plus connection is not connected to the frame. This will damage the
alternator, and may also damage the regulator.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Electrical system, special Service Information 2014/6/12
instructions for servicing,
electronic components
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Electrical system, special instructions for servicing, electronic


components
 If a connector on any of the data buses has been damaged, the bus must be replaced.
Note that the two cables included in each data bus are paired and twisted in order to protect them from electrical
interference. Cabling must only be repaired by trained personnel. As an alternative, the entire cable harness can be
completely replaced.

NOTE!
Electronic equipment is sensitive and may easily be damaged by electro-magnetic fields and/or by static electricity from
tools or the human body. Therefore, always follow the instructions below when performing work involving electronic
components.

The following instructions must be followed in order to meet the requirements for electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC).

 Connections to an electronic component must never be disconnected when the unit is supplied with electric power,
this may damage the electronics.
 Discharge any static electricity in tools before servicing the electrical system by touching the tool to a metallic
machine part that is connected to the frame.
 Never touch the connector pins on electronic units.
 Avoid touching circuit boards when servicing the electrical system. If this is necessary – only hold the circuit board
by the edges.
 Never touch individual electronic components.
 Make sure that ground cables are securely connected when replacing units.
 Never replace paired, twisted cabling with paired, non-twisted cabling.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Electrical system, special Service Information 2014/6/12
instructions for servicing,
action when working on
machine
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Electrical system, special instructions for servicing, action when


working on machine
 For electric welding on the machine, the battery cables must be disconnected and the connectors must be
unplugged from the control units.
 During blasting work on the machine, work very carefully to prevent damage to electrical cabling and components.
 Never aim the water jet directly at electrical components when using a high-pressure washer.
This is especially important when using a combination of warm water and degreasing agents.
 Before drilling or making any other holes in the machine, all electrical components in the area must be located with
great accuracy.

NOTICE
Drilling and other modifications to the cab structure are forbidden! The reason is that the ROPS protection may not
function as intended if the cab structure is modified.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Auxiliary start Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Auxiliary start
WARNING
Never boost-start the machine by connecting directly to the starter motor. This may result in uncontrolled machine
movements. When using another machine to boost-start, it must not touch the machine that is being started.

Auxiliary start with start cables


Check the following before connecting;
- That the ignition is OFF in both machines.
- That the machine cannot start to move when started.
- That the machines have the same system voltage.
- That the start cables are dimensioned for the max. current rating that the battery can generate.
- Start cables, with regards to cracks, oxidation and other defects.
- That battery cables are intact and connections are connected securely.
- That the machines do not touch each other.

WARNING
When using start cables, the positive and negative connection must not come into contact. Risk of personal injury.

Connect start cables as follows:

Figure 1
Connecting start cables

- Connect the first start cable (A) to the battery's plus terminal (1) on the machine to be started.
- Connect the other end of the cable (A) to the battery's plus terminal (2) on the assisting machine.
- Connect the other start cable (B) to the battery's minus terminal (3) on the assisting machine.
- Connect the other end of the cable (B) to the frame (4) on the machine to be started. Check that good electric contact is
obtained.
Auxiliary start:
- Check that the start cables are connected securely and correctly (figure).
- Start the engine in the assisting machine.
- Start the engine in the machine to be started. If the engine does not started within 30 seconds, wait for at least two
minutes before the next start attempt.
Remove the start cables follows:

Figure 2
Removing start cables

- Remove the cable (B) from the frame (1) on the machine that has been started with auxiliary start.
- Remove the other end of the start cable (B) from the battery's minus terminal (2) on the assisting machine.
- Remove the cable (A) from the battery's plus terminal (3) on the assisting machine.
- Remove the other end of the start cable (A) from the battery's plus terminal (4) on the machine that has been started with
auxiliary start.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Electronic control system, Service Information 2014/6/12
description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Electronic control system, description


General vehicle electronics
The new vehicle electronics, based on the data bus principle, lay the foundation for being able to proceed with development
and design of the system.
The improved diagnostic possibility makes for easier, faster and safer troubleshooting.
Further, the operator’s demand for information is fulfilled, through added functionality of the instrument, with the possibility
of obtaining read-outs of important information from the different electronic control units.
Conventional control system

Figure 1
Conventional system with connections

In principle, a conventional control system is designed in such a way that one or several of the vehicle’s components have
their own control unit that receives signals from various sensors (earlier generations of excavators have only been equipped
with a vehicle control system). Each control unit serves its own component and sends signals to the other control units and
operating controls by way of electrical cabling.
For example, an engine control unit that receives signals from various sensors on the engine and eventually from other
control units on the vehicle. Engine speed control switch position, travel speed signal, etc. are sent to the engine control unit
by way of cabling from different sensors and switches.
There must be one or several connections (sockets) in the system, where tools can be plugged in for programming and for
read-out of information and eventual error codes.
In the future, the individual machine components will require several control units per component, and machine electronics
will become increasingly complex. In time, this will limit the possibilities for a conventional control system to handle its task.
Data bus system
Figure 2
All control units (ECU) are connected via data buses

Volvo CE’s new vehicle electronics are based on the principle that all communication between the control units in the system
takes place by way of two data buses.
The main vehicle components are equipped with their own control units, that are connected to the buses for communication
with each other.
Simplified, this can be described as follows; when the operator wants to increase speed, a signal is sent from the engine
speed control switch or pedal (T mode) to the vehicle control unit and, through a data bus, the signal is transmitted to the
engine control unit.
The engine control unit communicates with the other control units by way of the buses, either by asking a question or by
receiving direct communication that all is in order to be able to "execute the command".
If a malfunction should appear in a system, a signal is sent out on the information bus, which makes it possible to read the
information, either on the operator’s instrument, the instrument electronic control unit (I-ECU), or with a VCADS Pro
connected to the service connection.
The data bus system provides a very flexible solution with extensive add-on possibilities.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Communication with data Service Information 2014/6/12
buses
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Communication with data buses

Figure 1
Communication

E-ECU Engine electronic control unit


ACM After treatment control module
I-ECU Instrument electronic control unit
ECC Electronic climate control unit
V-ECU Vehicle electronic control unit
PC3601 Service socket for VCADS Pro
W-ECU Caretrack system

General
The vehicle electronics are based on the principle that all communication between control units in the system takes place via
two data buses.
The machine's four control units are connected to the buses to be able to communicate with each other.
Communication between the different control units as well as reporting from control units to service sockets takes place on
data buses CAN/J1939 and J1708/J1587.
The buses adhere to SAE-standard and consist of two pair-twisted cables. The purpose of the twisting is to protect the bus
from electrical interference.
If a malfunction should occur in the system, a signal is sent on the information bus, making it possible to read the
information, either on the operator's instruments (I-ECU) or VCADS Pro.
The figure shows the principle for how the control units and service sockets are connected to the buses.
CAN/J1939 control bus
The system's control signals are sent via this bus. The control bus is very fast, which is a requirement for control of the whole
system to function and quickly adapt to varying conditions.
The main communication alternative is the CAN/J1939 bus. However, for E–ECU, some control data is only sent on the
J1708/J1587 bus.
J1708/J1587 information bus
The information bus is connected to the control units and service socket. Information and diagnostic signals are sent on this
bus. In addition, some control data is sent from the engine control unit via this bus.
The bus also functions as "back-up" for the control bus if it doesn't work for some reason.
Via the information bus, the system's status is updated continuously and is available for reading.
By connecting VCADS Pro to service sockets, it's possible to read error codes, perform tests, empty logged information,
upload parameters and upload software.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Data buses, function Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Data buses, function

Figure 1
The oscilloscope display shows voltage level on the data bus

Data buses constitute a way to transmit information between different components.


In conventional systems, primarily analogue signals have been used. Analogue signals mean that different voltage levels
represent different values.
A simplified example of analogue signals:
1 Volt = 10 °C (50 °F), 2 Volt = 20 °C (68 °F), 3 Volt = 30 °C (86 °F), etc.
Data buses use digital communication. This means that voltage only varies between two different values, either "high" or
"low". By combining these high and low signals, it is possible to describe different values.
The illustration shows an oscilloscope display where voltage is measured on the data bus. As is evident in the illustration, the
greatest part of the time is "silent" on the bus, but every so often, a number of fast impulses can be seen. A collection of
impulses is called a message.
The enlarged oscilloscope display shows a message that consists of a combination of high and low voltage levels.
Messages and information content
Figure 2
Information content

The different voltage levels are represented by the different digits in the binary number system. The binary number system
only has two digits, ones and zeros.
The ones normally represent a high voltage, and the zeros represent a low voltage.
Note in the example from the oscilloscope display, in this case, ones are shown as low voltage and zeros are shown as high
voltage, and this depends on which bus and on which cables the measurement is performed.
Every individual binary digit is called a "bit". This message consists of four groups of binary digits.
The start and stop bits are shaded since they do not contain any information.
Each group constitutes 1 Byte = 8 bits. One Byte can represent a value between 0 (0+0+0+0+0+0+0+0) and 255 (128+64
+32+16+8+4+2+1).
Figure shows the information content in the four different parts of the message.
The square in the illustration shows the different binary and decimal values that the information in the message contains.
NOTE!
The information is sent out on the bus with the "lowest" digit first of the binary digits. The normal way of noting binary
numbers is shown in the square in the illustration.

Figure 3
Voltage levels binary data

The purpose of the start and stop bits is only to function as markers for where the group begins and ends. In figure, only the
start and stop bits are marked, the other information is shaded.
Identification number
Figure 4
Identification of control units and components

Abbreviation Explanation

MID Message Identification D escription (identification of control unit). There is a unique number for each
control unit.

PID Parameter Identification D escription (identification of parameter/value). There is a unique number for
each parameter.

PPID Proprietary Parameter I dentification Description (Volvo-uniqueidentification of parameter/value).


There is a Volvo-unique number for each parameter.

SID Subsystem Identification D escription (identification of component). The SID-number depends on which
control unit (MID) that they are sent from. Each control unit has its own number series for SID. The
exceptions are SID-numbers 151 –255 which are general for all systems.

PSID Proprietary Subsystem I dentification Description. (Volvo-uniqueidentification of component).

FMI Failure Mode I dentifier (identification of failure type).


Figure 5
Identification of control units and components

The message consists of four parts, A, B, C and D.

Message on data bus

Part Explanation

A MID. MID 128 shows that the message comes from the engine control unit.

B PID. PID 100 shows component oil pressure sensor.

C Data part. In this example, it is shown what the engine oil pressure is. The value can vary between 000 for
minimum oil pressure and 255 for maximum oil pressure.

D Check sum. In this example, 240. The check sum is a check that the message is reasonable.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Service connection and Service Information 2014/6/12
programming connection
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Service connection and programming connection

Figure 1
Electronic system architecture

E-ECU Engine control unit ACM After treatment control module


I-ECU Instrument control unit MATRIS MAchine TRacking Information System
V-ECU Vehicle control unit VCADS Volvo Computer Aided Diagnostic System Professional
Pro
ECC Electronic climate control unit J1587 Information bus serial data 9.6 k bps
W-ECU CareTrack system J1939 Control bus serial data 256 k bps

Figure 2
A: Service socket

The service connection (socket) and programming socket are located by the radio.
The service socket is connected to the information bus and is used for communication with the following external
equipment.
VCADS Pro is the PC-tool used for:

 Programming of control units


 Downloading of vehicle parameters
 Reading of error codes
 Testing and checking of functions/components
 Calibration

When troubleshooting, this is of very significant importance, since all vital parts in the vehicle electronics can be checked
with VCADS Pro.
MATRIS is Volvo CE’s PC software for reading vehicle history. Logged vehicle parameters are compiled, processed and
presented in the form of different diagrams.
I-ECU operator's display unit is used for:

 Reading of error codes


 Showing machine information/status for engine, electric and hydraulics
 Showing software (program) version in control unit
 Showing status of inputs and outputs on control units
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Instrument control unit I- Service Information 2014/6/12
ECU, function description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Instrument control unit I-ECU, function description

Figure 1
I-ECU, position

The Instrument electronic control unit (I-ECU) is mounted on the right-hand side wall in the Cab.
The I-ECU displays the information received from the sensors and switches of the machine to alert the operator of any
abnormality.
The I-ECU contains a coolant temperature gauge, fuel gauge, and alert indicators to show machine conditions.
Figure 2
I-ECU

A: Central warning light

B: Gauge screen

C: Main screen

D: Indicator screen

The I-ECU receives information on the data bus. The information is processed and presented on the information display.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Keypad, description Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Keypad, description

Figure 1
Keypad for display unit and HVAC ( Heating, Ventilation , Air conditioning) system

Keypad is located on the right instrument panel. It is connected to the Instrument control unit (I-ECU).
Button function

Button Digit Description Button Digit Description


1 Fan speed control + - HVAC system on/off

2 Temperature control + 0 Arrow up, Browse upwards

3 Air flow direction - Rear view camera

4 Fan speed control – - Previous screen or escape

5 Temperature control – - Arrow down, Browse downwards

6 Air flow circulation - Selection, Acknowledge

7 Automatic mode selection - Automatic idling

8 Air conditioner - Overload warning

9 Defrost selection - Buzz stop


- ECO mode - Hammer/shear selection

HVAC control buttons


HVAC control buttons are used to control the HVAC system. Refer to the 870 HVAC system.
Rear view camera button
Rear view camera button turns on/off “Rear view camera screen”. When the rear view camera screen is turned on , whole I-
ECU screen displays only view from “rear view camera”.

Figure 2
Rear view camera

Buzz stop button


Buzz stop button is used to activates or deactivates “ Travel alarm” function of V-ECU. When this button is pressed so that
the function is activated, partial backlight fro this button is turned on.
Overload warning button
Overload warning button activates or deactivates “Overload warning” function. This function is to display the symbol and to
sound an alarm if the “Overload signal” is detected. When this button is pressed so that the function is activated, partial
backlight for this button is turned on.
Automatic idle button
Automatic idle button activates or deactivates “ Automatic idle” function of V-ECU. When this button is pressed so that the
function is activated, partial backlight for this button is turned on.
The engine speed will be lowered automatically to idle mode to reduce fuel consumption if any of control levers, travel
levers (pedals) or engine speed control switch are not operated for 5 seconds or more. If any of the above is operated, the
engine speed returns to the speed set with the engine speed control switch.
Arrow up button
This button is used to scroll items up and adjust the each segment on the screen.
Arrow down button
This button is used to scroll items down and adjust the each segment on the screen.
ESC button
This button is used to go back to the previous screen or to escape without saving. The ESC button is also used to turn OFF
the warning lamp and sound.
Hammer / shear selection button
Hammer / shear selection button is used to activates or deactivates “X1 function” of V-ECU.
ECO button
ECO function is a mode to enhance fuel efficiency when the machine working on the P, H, G1, G2 and G3 mode of the
engine speed.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Engine control unit E-ECU, Service Information 2014/6/12
function description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Engine control unit E-ECU, function description

Figure 1
E-ECU

The D8H engine’s injectors are controlled entirely by electronics, with regards to injected fuel amount and injection timing.
The system is called EMS 2 (Engine Management System 2).
The control unit receives continuous information from V-ECU (requested target engine speed) and a number of sensors on
the engine, and calculates the fuel amount and at what time the fuel should be injected into the cylinders. The control
signals to the unit injectors run through electrical cabling to the unit injector fuel valves.
The control unit stores information if a malfunction should occur, or if something in the system is abnormal. Even
malfunctions that occur sporadically are stored in the control unit and can thus be traced at a later time.
Functions

 Control of fuel volumes and unit injectors


 Monitoring of temperatures
 Detecting of engaged preheating
 Operating speed (rpm)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Vehicle control unit V-ECU, Service Information 2014/6/12
function description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Vehicle control unit V-ECU, function description


The V-ECU is mounted on the inside left cab wall. The technical regulations define the specifications for a V-ECU that is to be
used in Volvo excavators equipped with I-ECU, E-ECU, ECC and W-ECU with data links SAE J1587and J1939.

Figure 1
V-ECU

The V-ECU is a main control unit and controls solenoid valves, relays and proportional solenoid valves for hydraulics
according to switches in the cab as well as machine sensors with CAN communication with I-ECU, E-ECU, ECC and W-ECU in
Volvo excavator. It also handles logging of machine data in order to give service personnel access to machine information.
Functions

 Self-diagnostics
 Mode selection
 Safe start and stop
 Auto idle
 Automatic engine shutdown
 Start lock control
 Anti-theft system
 Emergency control
 Boost control
 Conflux cutoff control
 Travel speed control
 Float position control
 Cooling fan control
 Reversible cooling fan control
 X1 control
 X1 pressure control
 X3 control
 X3 response mode
 Quick fit control
 Travel alarm
 Overload warning
 DPF regeneration
 Electro hydraulic pump control
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Electronic climate control Service Information 2014/6/12
unit ECC, description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Electronic climate control unit ECC, description


The electronic climate controller, ECC, is located at the air conditioner unit. This is a full automatic controller, and controls
the fan speed, the heater, the air conditioner, the indoor/outdoor air selection and the air distribution. ECC has the serial
interface to I-ECU, and the different functions can be controlled by the keypad.

Figure 1
ECC

The control unit receives continuous information about temperature, pressure, rpm, etc. from a number of sensors. The
control unit is connected to the other control units via data link J1587/1708 for communication.
Functions

 Control of temperature, air distribution, and ventilation in cab


 Control of soft start, AC-compressor
 Monitoring of temperature and pressure
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


CareTrack W-ECU, Service Information 2014/6/12
description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

CareTrack W-ECU, description


General
CareTrack is a telematics system enabling machine owners to track and monitor machines from a computer with connection
to the Internet, regardless of how far away the machine is. By logging in to the CareTrack portal, it is possible to get
information about the machines' condition, at any time. For example, when they have been used, at what work mode they
have been operated, how much fuel they have consumed, or the exact positions of the machines.
CareTrack uses GSM (Global System for Mobile communication, same as is used for mobile telephones) for direct connection
to the machines' built-in computers (ECUs). By using a combination of the GSM-net and the satellite-based GPS-system
(Global Positioning System), CareTrack can move information from a machine to a computer connected to the Internet, via
the CareTrack portal.
The CareTrack unit consists of a built-in GPS receiver, satellite modem, and two antennas. When the machine is running, it is
online, and can be localized - at any time and in any place.
After having logged in via the secure CareTrack portal, the machines can be tracked and monitored online, in real-time.
However, the machine must be running to send real-time information, all other information is sent within 24 hours.
CareTrack is available on several continents, but in principle CareTrack works everywhere there is GSM coverage. Where
there is no coverage, satellite link can be used.
CareTrack is available in two versions, “Basic” and “Advanced”.

Figure 1

CareTrack unit

1. W-ECU
2. Satellite modem
Figure 2

1. GSM and GPS antenna.


2. Antenna for satellite communication.
3. W-ECU

CareTrack “Basic”

 Machine position: the exact position in latitude and longitude


 Real-time machine data: total number of machine hours
 Geographic restriction: The user indicates the geographic limits within which the machine must stay. If it wanders
outside the limits, an alarm is sent via e-mail and an SMS to mobile telephone.
 Time limit: the uses determines between what times and on what days the machine may be used. Here as well, an
alarm via e-mail and to mobile telephone is sent if the time limit is exceeded.
 Position report: summary of the machine's geographic movements
 Reports on daily use: shows how many hours the machine has operated and when it was started and stopped.
Reports are available per day, week, or month.
 Service reminders: send via e-mail and on the mobile telephone
 Service history: every machine's service history can be seen on the secure web portal
 Forwarding of service reminders: to co-workers or service provider
 Service reports: summary of current service
 Message when it's time to replace parts: informs about replacement of certain wear parts that are not included in
the normal service program, and reminds when it's time for replacement

CareTrack “Advanced”
Contains everything in CareTrack “Basic” as well as the following functions:

 Machine utilization: for example, daily reports on the previous 24 hours activities for all machines
 Incident reports: summary of events that are outside certain limits
 Performance report and productivity report: compare the individual machines' (or different shifts) performance and
productivity
 Alarms and warnings: alarm on the instrument panel can be sent via e-mail and mobile telephone as soon as they
occur
 History of alarms and warnings: summaries of alarms and warnings
 Error codes: summaries of error codes
 History of error codes
 Forwarding of alarms, warnings, and error codes: enables the dealer to check the machine before it arrives. This can
lead to fewer service trips, that the service technician can bring the right parts the first time, and it can minimize
downtime.
 Matris, complete download
 Matris, partial download
 Fuel consumption in real-time: available on the web portal and is shown in simple graph form
System description

Figure 3

1. Network node, control station.


2. CareTrack portal, for users.
3. E-mail, Matris, and Internet.
4. Satellite link for machine data.
5. Satellite for communication.
6. GSM-link for machine data.
7. Machine.
8. Satellite for GPS positioning.

Satellite communication
Satellite communication consists of a number of satellites that orbit the Earth at low altitude. Each satellite's coverage is a
few thousand kilometres in diameter. However, since satellites move quickly across the Earth's surface a powerful signal may
be lost just a few minutes later.
Signal-noise ratio
Signal-noise ratio, often abbreviated SNR or S/N, is a term that defines the relationship between the signal and the noise
effect that distorts the signal, that is, SNR compares the level of the useful signal (, e.g., music) with the background noise.
The higher the ratio the less one is disturbed by the background noise. For example, a CD-player has a ratio (= dynamics) of
approx. 90 dB. A record player may be able to handle 25 dB.
There are many factors that may give CareTrack a low S/N ratio: sources of interference close by, high buildings, thick
forests, high mountains, operating in a tunnel, thunderstorm, long distance to ground station (GSM), or that the
communication satellite is at the outer limit of its range.
Doppler effect
The Doppler effect is a phenomena that entails a change of the frequency (oscillation rate) of a signal, e.g., sound or noise,
depending on if the source is getting closer to or is moving away from the observer. An example of eh Doppler effect are
sirens on ambulances or police cars, that seem to increase (= a higher tone) when approaching the observer, and decrease
in frequency (= a lower tone) when they have passed.
The software in CareTrack uses the Doppler effect to calculate if a communication satellite is approaching the machine or
moving away from the machine.
Basic settings for CareTrack

1. W-ECU (CareTrack unit) is installed in the machine.


2. VCADS Pro is connected and the W-ECU is configured with chassis-ID, "sat-on", and "GSM-off".
3. Restart of the W-ECU.
4. The machine sends an activation message via GSM (SMS) or satellite to the network node for CareTrack.
5. A machine card is generated in the network node.
6. The user logs in to the CareTrack portal and enters data about the machine, e.g., chassis-ID.
7. Settings are sent to the machine.
8. The machine is now ready for monitoring and tracking in CareTrack.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


I-ECU, I/O list Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

I-ECU, I/O list


I-ECU connector (IA) pin

Pin No. Description Pin No. Description


IA1 +24 V(ACC) IA10 Alternator
IA2 Illumination IA11 Quickfit solenoid
IA3 Automatic greasing IA12 Fuel level sensor (−)
IA4 Fuel level senser (+) IA13 –
IA5 5 V (Sensor power) IA14 –
IA6 J1939_H (CAN1) IA15 V-ECU status
IA7 J1587_A IA16 J1939_L (CAN1)
IA8 Battery ground IA17 J1587_B
IA9 +24 V (Battery) IA18 Battery ground

I-ECU connector (IB) pin

Pin No. Description Pin No. Description


IB1 Rear view video signal 1 IB8 Rear view video signal 2
IB2 High beam IB9 Rear view video signal 2 ground
IB3 Turn signal, Left-hand IB10 Pattern change switch 1
IB4 Turn signal, right-hand IB11 Pattern change switch 2
IB5 Pump manual switch IB12 –
IB6 Rear view video power IB13 Signal ground
IB7 Rear view video signal 1 ground IB14 Sensor ground

I-ECU connector (IB) pin

Pin No. Description Pin No. Description


IC1 Rear view video signal 3 IC3 Rear view video signal 4
IC2 Rear view video signal 3 ground IC4 Rear view video signal 4 ground
Figure 1
I-ECU, connector

IA Connector, IA
IB Connector, IB
IC Connector, IC
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


V-ECU, I/O list Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

V-ECU, I/O list


V-ECU connector (VA) pin, specifications

Pin No. Description Pin No. Description


VA1 – VA9 –
VA2 Control lever left-hand 4 button switch, X3 VA10 Control lever left-hand 4 button switch, X3 switch,
switch, left-hand right-hand
VA3 Control lever right-hand 4 button switch, X1 VA11 Control lever right-hand 4 button switch, X1 switch,
switch, left-hand right-hand
VA4 Control lever right-hand 4 button switch, VA12 Control lever right-hand 4 button switch / control
boost switch lever proportional and switch, boom float switch
VA5 – VA13 Travel speed switch
VA6 – VA14 Quick fit switch, 1st
VA7 Ignition switch (C) VA15 Ignition switch (ACC)
VA8 V-ECU power +24 V VA16 V-ECU power +24 V

V-ECU connector (VB) pin, specifications

Pin No. Description Pin No. Description


VB1 Engine speed control switch power +24 V VB36 –
VB2 – VB37 –
VB3 Pressure, RCV 2nd bucket VB38 Control lever left-hand proportional and switch, X3
proportional switch
VB4 Pressure monitor, RCV 2nd arm in VB39 Control lever right-hand proportional and switch, X1
proportional switch
VB5 Pressure monitor, power +5 V VB40 Temperature sensor, hydraulic oil tank, ground
VB6 Pressure, RCV 2nd travel left VB41 –
VB7 Pressure monitor, power +5 V VB42 –
VB8 Pressure, RCV 2nd bucket VB43 Buzzer stop/confirm switch (buzzer stop)
VB9 Pressure monitor, power +5 V VB44 –
VB10 Control lever right-hand proportional and VB45 –
switch, power +12 V
VB11 – VB46 DPF switch, stop
VB12 – VB47 –
VB13 Temperature sensor, hydraulic oil tank VB48 –
VB14 Control lever right-hand proportional and VB49 –
switch, X1 proportional switch
VB15 Pressure, discharge P1 and P2, power +5 V VB50 –
VB16 – VB51 –
VB17 – VB52 Pressure monitor, ground
VB18 – VB53 Pressure monitor, RCV 2nd boom down
VB19 DPF switch, start VB54 Pressure monitor, ground
VB20 Buzzer stop/confirm switch (confirm) VB55 Pressure, RCV 2nd swing
VB21 – VB56 Pressure monitor, ground
VB22 Inductive sensor, ISO type control lever VB57 Pressure, discharge P1 and P2, ground
VB23 – VB58 Engine speed control switch, ground
VB24 – VB59 –
VB25 – VB60 Inductive sensor, Backhoe type control lever
VB26 – VB61 –
VB27 – VB62 –
VB28 – VB63 Power max mode switch
VB29 Pressure, RCV 2nd travel right VB64 –
VB30 Pressure, RCV 2nd boom VB65 –
VB31 Pressure , RCV 2nd X1 VB66 –
VB32 Pressure, RCV 2nd X2 VB67 –
VB33 Pressure, discharge P1 VB68 Control lockout lever
VB34 Pressure, discharge P2 VB69 Engine limp home switch (idle mode)
VB35 Engine speed control switch, signal VB70 Battery ground

V-ECU connector (VC) pin, specifications

Pin No. Description Pin No. Description


VC1 Fuse for relay and solenoid valve VC36 Travel alarm relay
VC2 Pump power shift 1 + VC37 –
VC3 Pump power shift 1 – VC38 J1587_A
VC4 1/2 pump select solenoid valve VC39 J1587_B
VC5 X1 right solenoid valve VC40 –
VC6 – VC41 X3 left proportional valve –
VC7 – VC42 X3 right proportional valve +
VC8 – VC43 X3 right proportional valve –
VC9 Arm in conflux solenoid valve VC44 –
VC10 Hammer select solenoid valve VC45 –
VC11 Main relay VC46 X3 left proportional valve +
VC12 Engine fan solenoid valve, rotation direction VC47 Fuse for proportional valve
VC13 – VC48 Battery ground
VC14 – VC49 X1 main flow control +
VC15 J1939_H VC50 X1 main flow control –
VC16 J1939_L VC51 Travel solenoid valve
VC17 Travel straight proportional valve + VC52 –
VC18 Travel straight proportional valve – VC53 –
VC19 Left-hand X1 flow preset proportional valve VC54 –
+
VC20 Left-hand X1 flow preset proportional valve VC55 Power boost solenoid valve

VC21 Fan motor proportional valve, hydraulic oil + VC56 –
VC22 Fan motor proportional valve, hydraulic oil – VC57 Shear select solenoid valve
VC23 Fuse for solenoid valve VC58 Start motor relay, 1st
VC24 Fuse for proportional valve VC59 –
VC25 Pump power shift 2 + VC60 V-ECU status
VC26 Pump power shift 2 – VC61 Battery ground
VC27 – VC62 X1 proportional valve 1 +
VC28 X1 left solenoid valve (hammer) VC63 X1 proportional valve 1 –
VC29 – VC64 X1 proportional valve 2 +
VC30 – VC65 X1 proportional valve 2 –
VC31 – VC66 –
VC32 Boom float solenoid valve VC67 –
VC33 – VC68 Boom conflux cut proportional valve +
VC34 – VC69 Boom conflux cut proportional valve –
VC35 – VC70 Battery ground
Figure 1
V-ECU, connector

VA Connector, VA
VB Connector, VB
VC Connector, VC
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


ECC, I/O list Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

ECC, I/O list


Pin No. Description Pin No. Description
BB1– – BB36– –
BB6 BB41
BB7 – BB42 Voltage feed (+24V)
BB8 Refrigerant pressure switch BB43 –
BB9 – BB44 –
BB10 SAE J1587A BB45 Air mix actuator, cold air
BB11 SAE J1587B BB46 Air blower
BB12 Foot actuator, left, closed BB47 Air blower
BB13 Foot actuator, left, open BB48 Air mix actuator, warm air
BB14 Face actuator, open BB49 –
BB15 Face actuator, closed BB50 Refrigerant temperature sensor
BB16 Foot actuator, right, open BB51 Ambient temperature sensor
BB17 Foot actuator, right, closed BB52 –
BB18 – BB53 –
BB19 Engine start switch BB54 Diesel heater signal
BB20 Air mix actuator voltage feed (+5V) BB55 –
BB21 Diesel heater relay BB56 Cab door switch
BB22 Ground to all actuators BB57 –
BB23 Air conditioner compressor clutch BB58 SAE J1939_H
BB24 Coolant temperature sensor BB59 –
BB25 – BB60 Air intake actuator, indoor air
BB26 Cab temperature sensor BB61 –
BB27 Air mix actuator feedback BB62 –
BB28 – BB63 Air intake actuator, outdoor air
BB29 – BB64 –
BB30 – BB65 –
BB31 – BB66 Voltage feed (+24V)
BB32 – BB67 Voltage feed (+24V) to actuators
BB33 – BB68 –
BB34 SAE J1939_L BB69 Ground
BB35 – BB70 Ground
Figure 1
Electronic climate controller, ECC
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


W-ECU, I/O list Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

W-ECU, I/O list


Pin No. Description Pin No. Description
1 – 10 –
2 – 11 J1587A, AVSS 0.85OR/R2 0.75OR
3 – 12 Ground, AVSS 0.85SB/R2 0.75OR
4 – 13 –
5 – 14 Switch key, AVSS 0.85R/R2 0.75R
6 – 15 –
7 BAT+, AVSS 0.85OR//R2 0.75OR 16 –
8 – 17 J1587B, AVSS 0.85OR/R2 0.75OR
9 – 18 –

Figure 1
W-ECU

A: W-ECU for CareTrack GSM/GPS

B: W-ECU for CareTrack Satellite


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Emergency operation, 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Emergency operation, description


When the J1939 and J1587 communication line is not available, it is impossible to control the engine speed with the V-ECU.
Then the operator must use the emergency control switch to control the engine speed. According to input switch, the V-ECU
determines engine control mode and main pump operation. For the wiring diagram, see 370 Wiring diagram SCH03.
Input signals

Pin No. ECU Description


VB69 V-ECU Engine limp home switch, SW2713

Output signal

Pin No. ECU Description


VC02 V-ECU Pump power shift 1, PWM9141
VC25 V-ECU Pump power shift 2, PWM9142

Function description
Low idling speed
If the following conditions are applied, the V-ECU sends a signal to the pump power shift valve to set the engine control
mode as I2 mode.

 Communication error between V-ECU and E-ECU.


 Emergency engine stop switch is Off (position 1).

High idling speed


If the following conditions are applied, the V-ECU sends a signal to the pump power shift valve to set the engine control
mode as H mode.

 Communication error between V-ECU and E-ECU.


 Emergency engine stop switch is On (position 2).

Engine stop
If the emergency engine stop switch is in the STOP position, the E-ECU loses electric power and the engine stops.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Anti-theft system 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Anti-theft system
The optional anti-theft system is only displayed if the optional equipment is selected. It can be activated with VCADS Pro
service tool.
To display anti-theft system screen on booting screen, a period of time must pass after turning off the engine. The default
time is 30 seconds and it is adjustable by VCADS Pro service tool.

Figure 1
Anti-theft system screen

Input signals
J1939 Input messages

ECU Description
Keypad Pin code
V-ECU, I-ECU Code lock option
V-ECU, I-ECU Code lock confirm

Parameters

Code Name
ABP[T1] Code lock protection
ABQ[T2] Code lock protection PIN code
ITR[T3] Theft Deterrent time delay

[T1]Parameters of V-ECU and I-ECU

[T2]Parameter of I-ECU

[T3]Parameter of I-ECU

For more information, see 301 Software parameters, description.


Output signals

Pin No. ECU Description


VC58 V-ECU Start motor relay, 1st

J1939 Output messages

ECU Description
I-ECU[T1] Code lock option
V-ECU
V-ECU, I-ECU Code lock confirm

[T1]When the V-ECU is not available, I-ECU can send shut-dwon request.

Function description
Control of anti-theft function, V-ECU

 V-ECU waits till the I-ECU sends a status message of “pin code matched”.
 If there were no status message, the V-ECU releases “start lock relay” and sends shut-down message to the E-ECU.
 If the V-ECU receives “pin code matched”, the V-ECU sends a pin code confirmation message to the I-ECU.

Control of anti-theft function, I-ECU

 I-ECU waits till the pin code input is completed from keypad.
 If the pin code valve is equal to the stored value, the I-ECU sends the status of message of “pin code matched”
 Once this anti-theft function is passed, then the anti-theft function will not be engaged when the machine is turned
ON until a period of time (default time: 30 seconds) after the machine is turned OFF.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Start lock, description 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Start lock, description


The starter motor operation is carefully limited so that the antitheft function can be performed.
Input signals

Pin No. ECU Description


VB68 V-ECU Control lockout lever, SW9118

Input messages

ECU Description
I-ECU Code lock condition

Parameters

Code Name
ABP Anti-theft protection

For more information, see 301 Software parameters, description.


Output signal

Pin No. ECU Description


VC58 V-ECU Start motor relay, 1st, RE3301

Condition for activation


If the following condition is applied, start lock relay RE3301 will be ON.

 Start switch, ON
 Control lockout lever, lower position (OFF)
 If there is anti-theft system option, code lock password must be matched.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Safe start and stop, 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Safe start and stop, description


The function describes the safe start and stop. This function contributes to component protection and enhancement of
durability.
Input signals

Pin No. ECU Description


VA7 V-ECU Ignition key switch (C)
VA15 V-ECU Ignition key switch (ACC))
VB04 V-ECU Pressure monitor, RCV 2nd arm in, SE9132
VB03 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd arm, SE9123
VB30 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd boom, SE9125
VB53 V-ECU Pressure monitor, RCV 2nd boom down, SE9131
VB55 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd swing, SE9126
VB08 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd BKT, SE9124
VB06 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd TL, SE9127
VB29 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd TR, SE9128
VB31 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd X1, SE9129
VB32 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd X2, SE9130
VA02 V-ECU X3 switch left-hand, SWJS4BL(SW9405)
VA10 V-ECU X3 switch right-hand, SWJS4BL(SW9406)
VB38 V-ECU X3 proportional switch, SWJSPBL(SW9161)
VB68 V-ECU Control lockout lever, SW9118

Input messages

ECU Description
E-ECU Power off allowed signal
I-ECU Power off allowed signal
E-ECU Engine speed

Parameters

Code Name
BFJ Connect X1 flow control
FYZ Connect X3 proportional control
FYY Connect X3 On / Off control

For more information, see 301 Software parameters, description.


Output signal

Pin No. ECU Description


VC11 V-ECU Main relay 1, RE3101
Main relay 2, RE3102

Output messages

Code Name
V-ECU Ignition key status
V-ECU Shutdown request
V-ECU Engine speed request

Safe start
If the ignition switch is turned to start position and the engine is starting, the following takes place:

 If there is no releasing condition, the engine speed control mode goes to I2 regardless of the engine control switch
mode.
 If there is releasing condition, the engine speed control mode goes back to the engine control switch indicating
mode.

Releasing condition:

 At lease one of RVC pressure is over 0.5 MPa


 Control lockout lever, upper position (On) and X3 switch operating
 Engine speed control switch change
 Position change on engine control switch.
 Control lockout lever, upper position (ON)

Safe stop
If the ignition switch is turned to OFF position, V-ECU sends shut down request to the E-ECU and I-ECU, and the following
takes place:

 V-ECU saves its data and then cuts off the main relay after 8 seconds from ignition key OFF if there is no power OFF
allowed signal from I-ECU and E-ECU.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


X1 control, description 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

X1 control, description
This is for X1 option attachment control. The function controls X1 option applications which are hammer and shear.
Input signal

Pin No. ECU Description


VA04 V-ECU Boost / Hammer switch, SWJS4BR (SW9108)
VA03 V-ECU X1 switch, left-hand, SWJS4BR (SW9163)
VA11 V-ECU X1 switch, right-hand, SWJS4BR (SW9164)
VB39 V-ECU X1 proportional switch, SWJSPBR (SW9162)
VB31 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd X1, SE9129
VB68 V-ECU Control lockout lever, SW9118

Input messages

ECU Description
I-ECU X1 flow rate setting
I-ECU X1 pressure setting
I-ECU X1 attachment
I-ECU X1 control
I-ECU X1 stop command
Keypad X1 activation button

Parameters

Code Name
FYW Connect X1 one-way switch
CVS Connect X1 two way switch
BFJ Connect X1 flow control
FYX Connect X1 presetting pressure
HNI Connect X1 single acting
HOJ Connect X1 pedal
HOI Connect X1 2–pump
IIO 4 switch control lever installed
IKM Proportional switch control lever installed

For the X1 set values, see 301 Software parameters, description.


Output signal

Pin No. ECU Description


VC19 V-ECU Left-hand X1 flow preset proportional valve, PWM9129
VC69 V-ECU Right-hand X1 flow preset proportional valve, PWM9130
VC49 V-ECU X1 main flow control proportional valve, PWM9109
VC28 V-ECU X1 left solenoid (hammer), MA9121
VC05 V-ECU X1 right solenoid, MA9122
VC62 V-ECU X1 proportional valve 1, PWM9123
VC64 V-ECU X1 proportional valve 2, PWM9124
VC10 V-ECU Hammer select, MA9117
VC57 V-ECU Shear select, MA9118
VC04 V-ECU 1/2 pump select, MA9116

Following tables describe how the function controls X1 application depending on single and double acting with 1 switch, 2
switch, proportional switch and pedal.
1 switch control and single acting
This function describes a single acting with 1 switch control.

Input signals Condition for output functions Output functions


MA9121, X1 left solenoid (hammer)
 VCADS Pro parameter IIN, 1  VCADS Pro parameter IIN, FYW, HNI “ON”
button RCV control lever “ON”
 VCADS Pro parameter FYW,  X1 select switch “ON”
X1 1way switch  Control lock out lever “ON”
 VCADS Pro parameter HNI,  Select 1–way on the I-ECU
X1 single acting  1 button RCV control lever, switch
 X1 activation button on “ON”
keypad
 SW9118, control lockout
lever

2 switch control and double acting


This function describes a double acting with 2 switch control.

Input signals Condition for output functions Output functions

 VCADS Pro parameter IIO 4  VCADS Pro parameter IIO, CVS “ON”
button RCV control lever  X1 select switch “ON”
 VCADS Pro parameter CVS,  Control lock out lever “ON”
X1 2way switch
 X1 activation button
 SW9118, control lockout  Select 1–way on the I-ECU  MA9117, hammer select
lever solenoid “ON”
 1–way or 2–way on the
IECU

 MA9117, hammer select solenoid  MA9121, X1 left solenoid


“ON” (hammer) “ON”
 RCV control lever hammer switch
“ON”

 Select 2–way on the I-ECU  MA9118, shear select


solenoid “ON”

 MA9118, shear selection solenoid  MA9121/MA9122, left /


“ON” right solenoid “ON”
 RCV control lever LH / RH switch
“ON”
1 switch control and pedal
This function describes 1 switch control with pedal on a double acting. In case of single acting, there exists only MA9117,
hammer selection solenoid with X1 pedal.

Input signals Condition for output functions Output functions

 VCADS Pro parameter FYW,  VCADS Pro parameter FYW, HOJ


1 way switch “ON”
 VCADS Pro parameter HOJ,  X1 activation button “ON”
X1 pedal  Control lock out lever “ON”

 1–way or 2–way on the


IECU  Select 1–way on the I-ECU  MA9117, hammer select
 X1 activation button solenoid “ON”
 SW9118, control lockout
lever

 MA9117, hammer select solenoid  MA9121, X1 left solenoid


“ON” (hammer) “ON”
 1 button RCV control lever, switch
“ON”

 MA9117, hammer select solenoid  Hammering


“ON”
 Pedal “Forward”

 Select 2–way on the I-ECU  MA9118, shear select


solenoid “ON”

 MA9118, shear select solenoid “ON”  MA9121,X1 left solenoid


 1 button RCV control lever, switch (hammer) “ON”
“ON”

 MA9118, shear select solenoid “ON”  Shear moves.


 Pedal “Forward”

 MA9118, shear select solenoid “ON”  Shear moves opposite


 Pedal “Reverse” direction.

Proportional control
This function describes proportional control with proportional switch. If the parameter set value FYV, proportional control, is
“0”, V-ECU convert proportional signal to ON/OFF signals to control hammer/ shear solenoid.

Input signals Condition for output functions Output functions

 VCADS Pro parameter IKM,  VCADS Pro parameter IKM, FYV


proportional RCV control “ON”
lever  X1 select switch “ON”
 VCADS Pro parameter FYV,  Control lock out lever “ON”
proportional control
 1–way or 2–way on the
IECU  Select 1–way on the I-ECU  MA9117, hammer select
 X1 activation button solenoid “ON”
 SW9118, safety lever

 MA9117, hammer select solenoid  PWM9123, X1 proportional


“ON” valve 1 “ON”
 Proportional switch slide “left”

 Select 2–way on the I-ECU  MA9118, shear selection


solenoid “ON”

 MA9118, shear select solenoid “ON”  PWM9123, X1 proportional


 Proportional switch slide “left” valve 1 “ON”

 MA9118, shear select solenoid “ON”  PWM9124, X1 proportional


 Proportional switch slide “right” valve 2 “ON”

Flow control

Input signals Condition for output functions Output functions

 VCADS Pro parameter BFJ,  VCADS Pro parameter BFJ, “ON”  1 pump control
flow control  VCADS Pro parameter HOI, “OFF”
 VCADS Pro parameter HOI,
2–pump flow
 SE9129, Pressure, RCV 2nd X1 “OFF”  MA9116, 1/2 pump selec
 Comparison between set flow (I- “OFF”
ECU) and X1 flow maximum + X1  PWM9109, X1 main flow
flow minimum control proportional valve
 If X1 set flow < X1 flow maximum “ON”
and X1 flow minimum, V-ECU
calculate current on the
proportional valve according to the
set flow on the I-EUC.

 VCADS Pro parameter BFJ, “ON”  2 pump control


 VCADS Pro parameter HOI, “ON”

 SE9129, Pressure, RCV 2nd X1 “ON”  MA9116, 1/2 pump selec


 Comparison between set flow (I- “ON”
ECU) and X1 flow maximum + X1  PWM9109, X1 main flow
flow minimum control proportional valve
 If X1 set flow > X1 flow maximum “ON”
and X1 flow minimum, the current  Pump 1 displacement will
on the proportional valve will be be decided according to
decided according to modified flow X1'.
value, X1' : X1 set flow on the I-ECU Pump 2 displacement will
– 1 flow maximum (1 pump max.) be maximum.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


X1 pressure control, 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

X1 pressure control, description


X1 pressure control
V-ECU controls to limit the maximum pressure of X1 system pressure according to X1 flow rate setting and X1 pressure
setting values from the I-ECU. For a X1 pressure setting parameter value, see 301 Software parameters, description.
Input signal

Pin No. ECU Description


VB35 V-ECU Engine speed control switch

Input messages

ECU Description
I-ECU X1 flow rate setting
I-ECU X1 pressure setting
E-ECU Engine speed

Output signals

Pin No. ECU Description


VC19 V-ECU PWM9129, Left-hand X1 flow preset proportional valve (+)
VC20 V-ECU PWM9129, Left-hand X1 flow preset proportional valve (-)

Input signals Condition for output functions Output functions

 VCADS Pro parameter FYX,  VCADS Pro parameter FYX, X1  Outputting the current of
X1 presetting pressure presetting pressure “ON” the PWM9129, left-hand X1
 X1 flow rate setting value  Calculating actual flow rate setting flow preset proportional
on I-ECU  If X1 pressure setting is maximum valve
 X1 pressure setting value setting value then the output
on I-ECU current jumps down to 0 mA.
 SW2701, Engine speed
control switch
 Current engine speed
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


X3 control, description 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

X3 control, description
This is for X3 option attachment control.
Input signal

Pin No. ECU Description


VA02 V-ECU X3 switch, left-hand, SWJS4BL (SW9405)
VA10 V-ECU X3 switch, right-hand, SWJS4BL (SW9406)
VB38 V-ECU X3 proportional switch, SWJSPBL (SW9161)
VB68 V-ECU Control lockout lever, SW9118

Parameters

Code Name
FYZ Connect X3 proportional control
FYY Connect X3 On/Off control
IIO 4 switch control lever installed
IKM Proportional switch control lever installed
LBR Connect X3 ON/OFF solenoid

For the X3 set values, see 301 Software parameters, description.


Output signal

Pin No. ECU Description


VC42 V-ECU X3 right proportional valve, PWM9145
VC46 V-ECU X3 left proportional valve, PWM9146

Following tables describe how the function controls X3 application.


On / off control

Input signals Condition for output functions Output functions

 VCADS Pro parameter IIO, 4  VCADS Pro parameter, IIO, FYY“ON”  PWM9146, X3 left
button RCV control lever  Control lock out lever “ON” proportional valve, “ON” or
 VCADS Pro parameter FYY,  4 button RCV control lever, switch PWM9145, X3 right
X3 on/off control “ON” proportional vale “ON”
 SW9118, control lockout  Select “Toggle” or “Push-button” at
lever the X3 operation setup on the I-ECU
 SW9405, X3 switch, left
hand
 SW9406, X3 switch, right  Select “Toggle” at the X3 operation  Pressing the on-off switch
hand setup on the I-ECU once activates the
proportional valve. Pressing
this on-off switch again
deactivates the
proportional valve.

 Select “Push-button” at the X3  On-off timing of PWM


operation setup on the I-ECU valve is same with a switch
of RCV control lever.

Proportional control

Input signals Condition for output functions Output functions

 VCADS Pro parameter IKM,  VCADS Pro parameter, IKM,  PWM9146, X3 left
proportional control lever FYZ“ON” proportional valve, “ON” or
 VCADS Pro parameter FYZ,  Control lock out lever “ON” PWM9145, X3 right
X3 proportional control  Proportional control lever, switch proportional vale “ON”
 SW9118, control lockout “ON”
lever  Select “Toggle”, “Push-button” or
 SW9161, X3 proportional “Proportional” at the X3 operation
switch setup on the I-ECU

 Select “Toggle” at the X3 operation  Sliding the proportional


setup on the I-ECU switch once activates the
proportional valve. Sliding
this proportional switch
again deactivates the
proportional valve.

 Select “Push-button” at the X3  On-off timing of


operation setup on the I-ECU proportional valve is same
with a switch of RCV
control lever.

 Select “Proportional” at the X3  The current is transmitted


operation setup on the I-ECU to the proportional valve in
proportion to the operating
angle of control lever.

Proportional current control


Figure 1

The proportional current for proportional solenoid valve is controlled by proportional control lever duty (%). If the RCV
PWM, proportional control lever duty (%) is between 47 % and 53 %, V-ECU recognize that the switch is off.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Response mode 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Response mode
X3 response mode
There is option to choose among three different response modes for the X3 function in the I-ECU menu.

Figure 1
X3 response mode

Input signals

Pin No. ECU Description


VB38 V-ECU X3 proportional switch

J1939 Input messages

ECU Description
I-ECU X3 response mode

Parameters

Code Name
BFK X3 control

For more information, see 301 Software parameters, description.


X3 response mode characteristic curves

 The three response modes describe different behaviour of the X3 control with the X3 proportional switch.
Figure 2
X3 response mode characteristic curves

1. Flow Active
2. Flow Normal
3. Flow Soft

A. Flow in %
B. Roller switch position in %, 0% = neutral position in %, 100% = end position

 The three different response modes are ‘Soft’, ‘ Normal’ and ‘Active’. The response mode function is only working
when the control of the selected X3 tool is ‘proportional’.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Electro hydraulic pump 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
control, description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Electro hydraulic pump control, description


Input signal

Pin No. ECU Description


B35 V-ECU Engine speed control switch
A04 V-ECU Boost / hammer switch
B04 V-ECU RCV 2nd pressure sensor (Arm in)
B03 V-ECU RCV 2nd pressure sensor (Arm out)
B30 V-ECU RCV 2nd pressure sensor (Boom up)
B53 V-ECU RCV 2nd pressure sensor (Boom down)
B55 V-ECU RCV 2nd pressure sensor (Swing)
B08 V-ECU RCV 2nd pressure sensor (Bucket)
B06 V-ECU RCV 2nd pressure sensor (Travel, left-hand)
B29 V-ECU RCV 2nd pressure sensor (Travel, right-hand)
B31 V-ECU RCV 2nd pressure sensor (X1)
B32 V-ECU RCV 2nd pressure sensor (X2)
B27 V-ECU RCV 2nd pressure sensor (Dozer blade)
A02 V-ECU Rotator switch, left-hand
A10 V-ECU Rotator switch, right-hand
A03 V-ECU X1, left-hand
A11 V-ECU X1, right-hand
B39 V-ECU X1 proportional switch
B38 V-ECU X3 proportional switch

Output signal

Pin No. ECU Description


C02 V-ECU Pump 1 control proportional valve
C25 V-ECU Pump 2 control proportional valve

Output messages

PID/PPID/SID ECU Signal name


PID91 E-ECU Engine speed request

Function description
The following functions describes how the V–ECU controls current to displace flow demand at pump 1 and pump 2.
Response mode

 The response mode provides the operator with 3 kinds of operating responses. In the order of Active, Normal and
Soft mode, the machine response will be slower so that the operator could select the mode preferred.
Figure 1

 A: Active mode
 N: Normal mode
 S: Soft mode

Attach operation check

 The function monitors whether the attachment has been operated or not. If the pilot pressure exceeds a specified
value, the controller decides that the attachment has been operated. Then the controller is ready to control pump
flow.
 Ready condition: pilot pressure > 5 kgf/cm2 (71 psi)

Figure 2

 Arm In, Arm Out, X2 control, Bucket, Boom Up, X1 control, Swing, Travel left and Travel Right.
 Boom down pilot pressure and float position is not activated.

 Ready condition: pilot pressure > 12 kgf/cm2 (171 psi)

Figure 3

 Boom up conflux pilot pressure and X1 is not operating.


 Boom up conflux pilot pressure and F mode is not selected.
 Arm (arm in and arm out) conflux and F mode is not selected.
 X1 conflux and x1 2 pump is activated.

Flow demand

 According to the response mode selected on I-ECU and RCV 2nd pressure V-ECU calculate flow demand for each
pump. In the positive control higher RCV operation means higher flow rate.

 For pump1 displacement: Arm In, Arm Out, Swing, Travel left, Boom up conflux and X1 control
 For pump2 displacement: Boom up, X2 control, Bucket, Travel Right, Dozer Blade, Arm conflux and X1
conflux

Neutral flow compensation


 The neutral compensation is that controller will increase in some extent to get rapid attachment response if the
attachment is about to move.
The V-ECU compensates flow rate with same flow rate regardless of engine work mode when machine starts
working.

Torque calculation

 The V-ECU calculate the torque required with pump displacement and pump delivery pressure.

Torque compensation

 Because of excessive load at the system, engine rpm can drop below specifications. To prevent this, V-ECU always
pays attention to actual rpm from E-ECU. If there is sharp rpm drop, V-ECU also reduce the amount of flow, to
recover the speed to target rpm.

Torque limit and modified flow demand

 The required torque must be smaller than maximum input torque. If not, V-ECU has to reduce the amount of flow.
Then V-ECU calculate final required flow from the final torque.

Minimum and maximum flow compensation

 The nominal control range of current for pump is 300 mA – 650 mA. V-ECU could use the 250 mA and 700 mA to
maintain min. and max. position in case of min. and max. required flow

Sensor input error

 If there have sensor input errors at one or more of sensors for pump1 and pump2 (SE9121 and SE9122), the both
pumps will have the minimum current.
 If there have sensor input errors at one or more of sensors except sensors for pump1 and pump2, there will have
minimum values for the corresponding pump.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Quick fit control, 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Quick fit control, description


This is for the Quick fit option attachment control. V-ECU receives the related switch signals and sends them to the I-ECU,
and then I-ECU activates the solenoid.
Input signals

Pin No. ECU Description


VA14 V-ECU Quick fit switch, SW9104
VB20 V-ECU Buzz stop/confirm switch (confirm), SW9160
VB40 V-ECU Buzz stop/confirm switch (buzz stop), SW9160
VB68 V-ECU Control lockout lever, SW9118

Parameters

Code Description
CNQ Quick fit installed

For more information, see 301 Software parameters, description.


Output signals

Pin No. ECU Description


VA11 I-ECU Quick fit solenoid, MA9109
I-ECU Alarm
I-ECU Quick fit indicator
I-ECU Central warning light

Function description
Quick fit release

Input signals Condition for output functions Output functions

 VCADS Pro parameter CNQ,  VCADS Pro parameter CNQ, ON  Quick fit solenoid MA9109,
Quick fit  Control lockout lever, ON ON
 SW9118, control lockout  Quick fit switch, ON[T1]  Central warning lamp, ON
lever  Quick fit indicator, ON
 Quick fit switch SW9104  Buzzer, ON

 VCADS Pro parameter CNQ, ON  Quick fit solenoid MA9109,


 Control lockout lever, OFF OFF
 Quick fit switch, ON  Central warning lamp, ON
 Quick fit indicator, ON
 Buzzer, ON

[T1]The quick fit switch is ON only If the quick fit switch is pressed from OFF to ON.
Audible warning and confirm switch

 When the buzzer sounds, if the buzzer stop switch is ON, the buzzer will be OFF.
 If the confirm switch is ON for confirming that quick fit is in closed position, the buzzer, warning lamp and indicator
will be off
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Mode selection, description 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Mode selection, description


This function allows the operator to select the engine speed and work mode according to the working condition and
environment to optimize the machine performance and fuel efficiency.
The V-ECU continuously receives the current engine speed from the E-ECU. It balances engine output horsepower and
hydraulic pump drive horsepower by changing the pump swash angle with driving proportional solenoid valve to keep
pump torque below the engine torque developed at the selected engine speed.
NOTE!
P mode is not applied to North America.

Input signals

Pin No. ECU Description


VB35 V-ECU Engine speed control switch, SW2701
VB63 V-ECU Power Max mode selection switch, SW9110
VB68 V-ECU Control lockout lever, SW9118

Parameter

Code Description
DST2 Power Max mode option
LUH Engine control mode with power max switch

Output signals
J1939 output message

ECU Signal name


V-ECU Engine speed request
V-ECU Mode status message

J1587 Output message

ECU Signal name


V-ECU Percent accelerator pedal position

Function description

Input signals Conditions for out functions Out functions

 Engine speed control  Engine speed control switch  Pump Max. torque : 100 %
switch, SW2701 step-9  Engine speed which
 Power max. mode  Power max mode selection switch corresponds to P mode
selection switch, SW9110 pushed[T2]
 Power max mode option
parameter, LUH[T1]
 Engine speed
 Engine speed control  Engine speed control switch  Pump Max. torque : 95 %
switch, SW2701 step-9  Engine speed which
 Power max mode option corresponds to H mode
parameter, LUH
 Engine speed
 Engine speed control switch  Pump Max. torque : 90 %
step-6/7/8  Engine speed which
corresponds to G mode

 Engine speed control switch  Pump Max. torque : 70 %


step-3/4/5  Engine speed which
corresponds to F mode
 Power boost solenoid valve, ON
 Boom / arm conflux cut-off
solenoid valve, ON
 Travel speed selection solenoid
valve, ON

 Engine speed control switch  Pump Max. torque : 50 %


step-1/2  Engine speed which
corresponds to I mode

[T1]V-ECU applies control specification values according to the option parameter, LUH status.

[T2]P mode and H mode are selected in rotation by each push of the power max mode selection switch.

Specification proportional solenoid valve current and max pump input torque, see 270 Engine - Pump control, specification.
P mode (Full duty operation)

 P (Power maximum) mode functions on the P mode selection switch ON with step-9 of the engine speed control
switch to maximize working capacity and working speed by utilizing 100% of the maximum pump input torque.
This mode is for heavy duty excavating operations which require powerful digging and lifting force.

H mode (Heavy duty operation)

 H mode functions on step-9 of the engine speed control switch and the power maximum mode selection switch
OFF to increase the working capacity and working speed by utilizing 95% of the maximum pump input torque.

 This mode is for slightly heavy duty excavating operations which require powerful digging and lifting force.

G mode (General duty operation)

 G mode functions over a 3 step range as follows:


Step-6/7/8 utilize 90% of the maximum pump input torque and is recommended for general duty operations that
are below the level which require maximum engine output.
 These positions provide the most efficient, fuel saving, economical machine performance for general excavating
and loading operations.

F mode (Fine duty operation)

 Fmode functions over a 3 step range as follows:


Step-3/4/5 utilize 70% of the maximum pump input torque.
At the same time, the V-ECU activates the boom / arm conflux shut-off solenoid valves and shuts off summation of
the two hydraulic pumps when operating the boom or arm.
Also, the V-ECU activates the power boost solenoid valve. It provides fine controllability for precise smooth
movements and maximum lifting force at mid-range engine speeds.
Description of boost control, see 301 Boost control, description.
 This mode is recommended for finishing/levelling work and when fine precision control of the boom and arm is
essential.

I mode (Idling operation)

 I mode functions over a 2 step range as follows:


Both steps minimize the output of the pumps.
Step-1 is the low idle speed set at engine starting.
Step-2 is the auto idle speed and is available if the auto idling selection switch is in the ON position.
Description of auto idle, see 301 Auto Idle.

Signal condition of control lock

 If the control lockout lever is goes from the upper position to lower position, V-ECU sets the engine control mode
to the I2 mode and saves the previous engine control mode.
 If the control lockout lever moves from the lower position to upper position, V-ECU sets the engine control mode
to the previous mode.

Figure 1

A. Control lockout lever, ON


B. Control lockout lever, OFF
C. Previous engine speed control mode
D. I2 mode
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Boost control, description 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Boost control, description


Automatic power boost
When high pressure is required like travelling in fixed speed or high pressure is needed for fine control (F-mode), working
pressure will be boosted automatically by the V-ECU to enhance machine performance.
Input signal

Pin No. ECU Description


VB35 V-ECU Engine speed control switch, SW2701
VA04 V-ECU Boost / Hammer switch, SWJS4BR (SW9108)
VB04 V-ECU Pressure monitor, RCV 2nd boom down, SE9132
VB03 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd arm, SE9123
VB30 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd boom, SE9125
VB53 V-ECU Pressure monitor, RCV 2nd boom down, SE9131
VB55 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd swing, SE9126
VB08 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd Bucket, SE9124
VB06 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd travel left, SE9127
VB29 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd travel right, SE9128
VB31 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd X1, SE9129
VB32 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd X2, SE9130

Input messages

ECU Description
Keypad X1 activate button

Parameter

Code Name
HOQ Boost lasting time

For more information, see 301 Software parameters, description.


Output signal

Pin No. ECU Description


VC55 V-ECU Boost solenoid valve, MA9125

Output messages

ECU Description
V-ECU Boost indicator status

Function description
F mode boost
If F mode selected,
Figure 1
Indicator, power boost

 V-ECU turns on the boost solenoid valve signal.


 V-ECU sets the boost indicator status to ON.

Travel boost
If the travel remote control valves are operated and if other attachment remote control valves are not operated,

 V-ECU turns on the boost solenoid valve signal.


 V-ECU sets the boost indicator status to OFF.

One touch boost


If the power boost switch is turned on,

 V-ECU turns on the boost solenoid valve signal for 9 seconds.


 For repeated button press, this one touch boost function is initiated after finishing 9 seconds turning on.
 The time 9 seconds can be changeable with VCDS Pro service tool.
 V-ECU set the boost indicator status to ON.

Deactivation of one touch boost


If the FYW “connect X1 one-way switch or HNI “ connect X1 single acting” is selected, and hammer solenoid valve is
activating condition by X1 activation button, the one touch power boost is deactivated.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Boom float position, 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Boom float position, description


Float position means that both the boom cylinder piston and piston rod are connected to the hydraulic tank. This means
that only the weight of the arm and bucket lowers the boom when right control lever is pushed forward.
This function allows the attachment to float on the ground, so that the operator easily works leveling operation and reduces
the fuel consumption using weight of attachment and the material loaded.
Input signal

Pin No. ECU Description


VA12 V-ECU Float position switch

Parameter

Code Name
BNJ Float position function

For more information, see 301 Software parameters, description.


Output signal

Pin No. ECU Description


VC32 V-ECU Boom float solenoid valve, MA9120

Output messages

ECU Description
V-ECU Float position indication
V-ECU Float position solenoid, MID187 PPID1128

Function description

Figure 1
Indicator, float position

For float position control, boom float solenoid valve must be installed. When the float position parameter BNJ is selected
and the float position switch is On, the float position solenoid valve is activated and the indicator is shown on the I-ECU.
NOTE!
When the boom float function is on, the function will remain even if the ignition key is turned off and on again. The indicator
on the instrument panel will be also displayed
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Cooling fan control 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Cooling fan control


Cooling fan control is classified according to the type of fan driven. Standard drive is controlled with a fan clutch, and
Reversible fan drive is controlled with hydraulic cooling fan. The V-ECU adjusts the currents to the proportional valve of
hydraulic oil fan motor and fan clutch. Cooling fan speed should vary with respect to the hydraulic oil temperature, coolant
temperature, charged air temperature and compressor operation for the air conditioner.
Input signals

Pin No. ECU Description


VB13 V-ECU Hydraulic oil temperature sensor, SE9105

Input messages

ECU Description
I-ECU Compressor Status
E-ECU Induction/charge air temperature, FX1007(SE2507)
E-ECU Coolant temperature, SE2606
E-ECU Ambient air temperature sensor, FX1008 (SE2501)
E-ECU Fan clutch speed sensor, SE2601

Output signals

Pin No. ECU Description


VC21 V-ECU Hydraulic oil fan motor proportional valve, PWM9143
EB49 E-ECU Fan clutch proportional valve, PWM2601

Function description

Figure 1

The current for cooling fan control can be determined by 4 factors:


 Hydraulic oil temperature (K )
 Coolant temperature (Kᵉ ᵍ)
 Charged air temperature (K )
 Compressor operation for the air conditioning

V-ECU calculates each coefficient, hydraulic oil temperature, coolant temperature and charged air temperature, and sets the
maximum value for the control fan speed.
K = max. (K , Kᵉ ᵍ, K ᵃ )

Figure 2
Fan speed control curve

A. Maximum current
B. Minimum current

1. Full speed
2. Minimum speed

a. Expected rotating speed of cooling fan


b. Current for cooling fan valve

The minimum and the maximum current of the fan speed control curve will be determined with respect to the engine speed
control mode. If air conditioning compressor is ON, V-ECU selects the higher rpm between the current engine rpm and
compressor rpm.
If the machine has a pre-heating option and the pre-heating signal is ON, the fan speed will be minimum before the pre-
heating time has elapsed for engine fuel efficiency. For the cooling fan current, see
9113 Hydraulic oil cooling system, specifications
Reversible type

 Cooling fan speed varies with input current to the proportional valve of the hydraulic oil fan motor. The fan speed
would not be controlled linearly because of its characteristic. The fan speed control curve is for understanding.
 Decreasing the current will increase the hydraulic pressure to the fan motor, which increases the cooling fan speed.
This negative control protects the hydraulic cooling system and engine from overheating when there is a failure in
the V-ECU.

Fan clutch type

 Cooling fan control signals calculated by V-ECU sent to the E-ECU. Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) signal is sent to
the proportional valve to control flow of fluid in the fan clutch. The fan clutch requires a fan speed feedback from
speed sensor to compensate control speed.
 If there would be a communication error between E-ECU and V-ECU, cooling fan speed will be controlled by
coolant temperature.
 When there is a defect in the proportional solenoid valve, the valve will be a open position and the fan will operate
at maximum speed.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Automatic engine shut-off 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Automatic engine shut-off


This function shuts down the engine automatically after the machine has been idled for a certain period of time, to conserve
fuel consumption.
The operator will be warned of the pending shut-down and have the opportunity to avoid it. The automatic engine shut
down time which is set 5 minutes can be changed with VCADS Pro only.
Input signal

Pin No. ECU Description


VB68 V-ECU Control lockout lever, SW9118
VB35 V-ECU Engine speed control switch, SW2701

Parameters

Code Name
FAU Automatic Engine shut-down
FAV Automatic Engine shut-down time

For more information, see 301 Software parameters, description.


Output signal

Pin No. ECU Description


VC58 V-ECU Start motor relay, RE3301
– I-ECU Information message display
– I-ECU Beeping sound
– I-ECU Warning message display

Function description
Engine shut-down time will be reduced in real time while the machine is in the automatic engine shut-down conditions.

Figure 1
Time sequence

A. Automatic engine shut-off conditions


B. Countdown screen display
C. Beeping sound
D. Warning screen display

Automatic engine shut-down conditions

 Option parameter (FAU) is activated


 Engine is running over 500 rpm
 Control lockout lever is down (off)
 The engine speed control switch is not changed
 DPF regeneration is not on progress
 Alert message of “Automatic Engine Shut-off” on I-ECU has not disappeared with ESC button on keypad

Display countdown screen

Figure 2

 When the shut-off time reaches 1 minute, the information message with countdown screen will be displayed on I-
ECU

Beeping sound

 When the shut-off time reaches 3 seconds, beeping sound will be generated 3 times

Display warning screen

Figure 3

 When the time ends, the information messaged will be changed to the warning message.
 The start motor relay will be turned OFF and the shut-off request will remain to be activated until the key switch is
turned OFF.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


DPF regeneration control 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

DPF regeneration control


DPF regeneration control
The tier 4i engine has an exhaust aftertreatment system (EATS) in the form of a diesel particulate filter (DPF). This function
activates or deactivates DPF regenerator based on the engine conditions and user confirmation.
Input signal

Pin No. ECU Description


VB19 V-ECU DPF regeneration switch (start), SW2506
VB46 V-ECU DPF regeneration switch (stop), SW2506

Parameters

Code Name Description


NPH Regeneration type 0 = regeneration function disabled (used for tier2 engines)
1 = manual regeneration function (used for tier4 engines)
2 = automatic regeneration function

NOTE!
Due to the production process of the DPF, increased smoke generation occurs during the first regeneration.

It is not possible to regenerate when the soot load is too low (Below 100%).
During regeneration, indicator (B) will be displayed.
If DPF regeneration stop is pressed while regeneration is being fulfilled, indicator (B) will be displayed until the exhausted
gas temperature is at normal operation temperature.

Figure 1

Indicator (B), on regeneration

DPF regeneration cancel condition (while regeneration)


Figure 2
Check screen for regeneration cancel

 When DPF regeneration stop is pressed, the check screen for regeneration cancel would show up for 5 seconds.
 When the control lockout lever is set to upper position on level 3, the check screen for regeneration cancel would
show up for 5 seconds.

WARNING
Risk for fire.

Regeneration generates hot exhaust and causes hot exhaust pipe. Do not perform regeneration in a flammable
environment.

When DPF regeneration;

 Make sure that there is no flammable material around the machine, this is important to prevent risk of fire.
 Move the machine to safety area, if there is a risk that people may get too close and then perform the regeneration.

There are four messages about the levels of regeneration. Each level has a different alarm screen which consists of warning
screen, check screen and indicator.

 Level 1

Figure 3

Indicator, regeneration required

The soot load is 100 ~ 114%.


- Central warning lamp will light up with yellow color.
- Check screen and indicator will be displayed.
NOTE!
Check screen can be dismissed by pressing ESC button, it will pop up again after 15 minutes if screen was
dismissed.

Check screen can be displayed after the key is turned off and on.

If DPF regeneration switch is pressed to position 1, the regeneration will start immediately.
Operator can move the machine during the regeneration status of engine.
Machine condition to start regeneration
- Coolant temperature is over 70℃.

Figure 5

Information screen (green)


Semi-auto regeneration (optional equipment)
Semi-auto function is available only in level 1 and level 2.
After check screen (A) shown, check screen (B) will be displayed.
After 1 minute, the machine starts regeneration automatically if it meets below conditions.
Machine condition to start semi-auto regeneration
- Control lockout lever is unlocked position
- No system fault
Otherwise operator can start or stop the regeneration immediately by pressing DPF regeneration switch.

Figure 6

 Level 2

The soot load is 115 ~ 125%.


When the first regeneration message is ignored;
- Central warning lamp will light up with yellow color.
- Check screen and indicator will be displayed.
NOTE!
Check screen can be dismissed by pressing ESC button, it will pop up again after 15 minutes if screen was
dismissed.

Check screen can be displayed after the key is turned off and on.

Due to engine protection, the engine power is reduced gradually even engine rpm goes up.
If DPF regeneration switch is pressed to position 1, the regeneration will start immediately.
Operator can move the machine during the regeneration status of engine.

Figure 8

Check screen for level 2

A. Regeneration required (yellow)


B. Regeneration starts in 1 min (yellow)(optional equipment)

Machine condition to start regeneration


- Coolant temperature is over 70℃.

Figure 9

Information screen (green)


Semi-auto regeneration (optional equipment)
Semi-auto function is available only in level 1 and level 2.
After check screen (A) shown, check screen (B) will be displayed.
After 1 minute, the machine starts regeneration automatically if it meets below conditions.
Machine condition to start semi-auto regeneration
- Control lockout lever is unlocked position
- No system fault
Otherwise operator can start or stop the regeneration immediately by pressing DPF regeneration switch.

Figure 10

 Level 3

The soot load is 126 ~ 161%.


When the second regeneration message is ignored;
- Central warning lamp will blink with red color.
- Warning screen and indicator will be displayed.
NOTE!
Warning screen can not be dismissed by pressing ESC button or SELECT button.

Warning screen can be displayed when other messages are dismissed on the screen.

Due to engine protection, the engine power is widely reduced and machine operation is limited.
A→C
- If the regeneration status is changed to the level 3 while the control lockout lever is set to upper position,
the first warning screen (A) is shown. Then, if the control lockout lever is set to lower position, the third
warning screen (C) is shown.
B→C
- If the regeneration status is changed to the level 3 while the control lockout lever is set to lower position
and the engine speed control switch is set to any mode except I2 mode, the second warning screen (B) is
shown. Then, if the engine speed control switch is set to I2 mode, the third warning screen (C) is shown.
NOTE!
DPF regeneration only can be started in condition of the third warning screen (C).

The machine needs to be stand-still to run the regeneration.


Operator can not move the machine during the regeneration status of engine.

Figure 12

A. First warning screen for level 3 (red)


B. Second warning screen for level 3 (red)
C. Third warning screen for level 3 (red)

Machine condition to start regeneration


- Coolant temperature is over 70℃.

Figure 13

Information screen (green)

 Level 4

The soot load is over 162%.


When the third regeneration message is ignored;
- Central warning lamp will blink with red color.
- Warning screen and indicator will be displayed.
NOTE!
Warning screen can not be dismissed by pressing ESC button or SELECT button.

Warning screen can be displayed when other messages are dismissed on the screen.

Figure 15
Warning screen for level 4 (red)
Due to engine protection, the engine power is reduced maximally even engine rpm goes up.
DPF regeneration can not be performed by the operator. The regeneration needs to be done by a service
technician.
NOTE!
DPF regeneration is only possible with VCADS Pro.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Travel alarm 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Travel alarm
The function is used to warn the surrounding area when the machine is moving. For the wiring diagram, see,
370 Wiring diagram SCH12.

Input signals

Pin No. ECU Description


VB06 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd travel left, SE9127
VB29 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd travel right, SE9128

Input messages

ECU Description
Keypad Travel alarm / buzzer stop

Parameters

Code Name
BFQ Connect travel alarm

For more information, see 301 Software parameters, description.


Output signals

Pin No. ECU Description


VC36 V-ECU Travel alarm relay, RE4206

Function description
If the following conditions are applied, the travel alarm request will be on.

 Parameter BFQ, ON
 Travel pressure, RCV 2nd travel left and right are over 0.5 MPa (72.5 psi)

When the buzzer stop button on Keypad is activated, the travel alarm is OFF.
NOTE!
When the start key switch is at OFF and ON, the buzzer stop button is default (OFF).
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Overload warning 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Overload warning
This function monitors the overload pressure sensor and warns the driver when the pressure of boom cylinder is over the
setting pressure.
Input signal

Pin No. ECU Description


VB02 V-ECU Overload pressure monitor, SE9401

Parameters

 (HXY), Overload
 (IKN), Overload boom cylinder pressure setting

See also, 301 Software parameters, description.


Function description
Overload function on / off

Figure 1
Overload select indicator

 Parameter HXY enable this function.


 I-ECU sets function on / off with the signal of pressing overload select button from keypad.
 If the overload select button is ON, overload select indicator (green) is shown on the I-ECU and the backlight for
this button is turned on.
 Enable function status is saved when the key is turned off and on.

Overload warning

Figure 2
Warning screen
Figure 3
Overload warning indicator

When the overload function is ON, if the value of pressure sensor is over the setting value, there are several alarm actions:

 Warning screen (only once since key on)


 Buzzer is sounding
 Warning lamp is blinking
 Overload warning indicator (red) is shown on the I-ECU

If the pressure goes below the setting pressure or the overload function is OFF:

 Buzzer is off
 Warning lamp is off
 Overload warning indicator (red) disappears

If the warning screen pops up, it remains with buzzer and lamp until it is cancelled by ESC button. Buzzer and warning lamp
can be cancelled by pressing ESC button if the sensor pressure is below the setting pressure. The warning screen is cancelled
only by pressing ESC button twice regardless of the pressure.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Auto Idle 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Auto Idle
The purpose of the auto idle function is to automatically enter idle mode when the machine is not operated for some time.
When the machine is put in idle mode engine speed is decreased in order to lower the fuel consumption.
After the engine has decelerated, if the operator touches one of the remote control valves (control levers, pedals) or turns
the engine speed control switch or pushes one of the rotator switches, engine speed is increased to the selected speed of
the engine speed control switch. For the wiring diagram, see 370 Wiring diagram SCH08.
Input signals

Pin No. ECU Description


VB35 V-ECU Engine speed control switch, SW2701
VB04 V-ECU Pressure monitor, RCV 2nd boom down, SE9132
VB03 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd arm, SE9123
VB30 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd boom, SE9125
VB53 V-ECU Pressure monitor, RCV 2nd boom down, SE9131
VB55 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd swing, SE9126
VB08 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd Bucket, SE9124
VB06 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd travel left, SE9127
VB29 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd travel right, SE9128
VB31 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd X1, SE9129
VB32 V-ECU Pressure, RCV 2nd X2, SE9130
VA02 V-ECU X3 switch, left-hand, SWJS4BL (SW9405)
VA10 V-ECU X3 switch, right-hand, SWJS4BL (SW9406)
VB68 V-ECU Control lockout lever, SW9118
VB38 V-ECU X3 proportional switch, SWJSPBL (SW9161)

Input messages

ECU Description
Keypad Auto idle selection switch

Parameters

Code Name
BFJ Connect X1 flow control
FYZ Connect X3 proportional control
FYY Connect X3 On / Off control

For more information, see 301 Software parameters, description.


Output signals
Output messages

ECU Description
V-ECU Auto idle selection switch status
See also, 301 Software parameters, description.
Releasing conditions: The auto idle will be deactivated, If the one of following condition is applied.

 At lease one of RCV pressure is over 0.5 MPa (72.5 psi)


 Control lockout lever and X3 switch operation, ON
 Engine speed control switch, change
 Control lockout lever, ON / OFF change

Automatic idle delay time


Default time is 5 seconds and changeable from 3 to 20 seconds on the I-ECU
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


VCADS Pro, 17030-3 - 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
Parameter, programming
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

VCADS Pro, 17030-3 - Parameter, programming


Caution: It is inadvisable to change any parameter settings without the user knowing exactly what is to be done. Typically,
parameters are only to be changed when installation instructions, service bulletins or other similar things inform the user to
do so. Incorrectly adjusting parameters can have a serious impact on the machine.
How to change a parameter
To change a parameter the user must follow these steps:

 Run the parameter programming operation and locate the parameter they would like to change by navigating
through the options. Changes can be made to the parameter setting by altering the “valve” column.
 Click the button labeled “continue” followed by “program” on the confirmation dialogue box that appears.
 If prompted, enter your static / Digipass password.
 Click the “stop” button followed by the “close” button. Turn the machine off when prompted to apply the
parameter changes.

NOTE!
Changing the vehicle parameters requires an internet connection.

NOTE!
The user will be prompted if charges apply to changing a particular parameter.
Figure 1
Example of parameter programming

Parameter programming template


This function includes creation, editing and application of templates for parameter programming. The advantage of using
templates is when several vehicles require programming with the same set of parameters and values. It makes the
programming procedure considerably faster and reduces the chance of inconsistencies between machines.
For instructions on how to program parameters using a template see the “Programming” section in the Help section of
VCADS Pro on your VCADS Pro service tool.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Grading and lifting control, 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Grading and lifting control, description


This function describes grading and lifting control controlled by proportional valve. Boom conflux cut proportional valve,
PWM9157 is used for grading control and travel straight proportional valve, PWM9156 is for lifting control.

 The grading control is that pilot pressure which controls a boom summation spool is proportionally reduced
according to arm operation.
 The lifting control is that pilot pressure which controls a travel straight spool is synchronized with attachment pilot
signals.

Input signal

Pin No. ECU Description


VB04 V-ECU Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd arm in, SE9132
VB03 V-ECU Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd arm, SE9123
VB30 V-ECU Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd boom, SE9125
VB55 V-ECU Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd swing, SE9126
VB08 V-ECU Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd bucket, SE9124
VB06 V-ECU Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd travel left, SE9127
VB29 V-ECU Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd travel right, SE9128
VB31 V-ECU Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd X1, SE9129
VB32 V-ECU Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd X2, SE9130
VB27 V-ECU Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd dozer blade, SE9138

Parameter

Code Name
IZS Long reach boom installed

For more information, see 301 Software parameters, description.


Output signal

Pin No. ECU Description


VC17 V-ECU Travel straight proportional valve, PWM9156
VC69 V-ECU Boom conflux cut proportional valve, PWM9157

Grading control

 Boom conflux cut proportional valve produces a proportional control current signal according to the boom up pilot
pressure synchronously.
Figure 1
Boom conflux cut proportional valve control current

 A: Boom conflux cut proportional valve control current


 B: Boom up pilot pressure
 P1: low pressure
 P2: high pressure
 C1: low current
 C2: high current

 Boom conflux cut proportional valve secondary pressure is decreased linearly according to the Arm in pilot
pressure.
 If X1 pilot pressure is over 1.66 Mpa (241 psi) (17 kg/cm2), proportion valve makes no signal.

 If machine has IZS option parameter, an operator can control “Boom Up conflux” using I-ECU menu.

Figure 3
Boom up conflux, I-ECU menu

Lifting control

Figure 4
Travel straight proportional valve secondary pressure

A. Travel straight proportional valve secondary pressure


B. Attachment pilot pressure

When travel and attachment are operated simultaneously, travel straight proportional valve produces a proportional control
current signal with attachment pilot pressure synchronously for all engine speed control mode.
Complementary information
 For wiring diagram, 370 Wiring diagram SCH08.
 For hydraulic diagram, 990 Hydraulic diagram, with option components.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


ECO mode, description 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

ECO mode, description


ECO mode is an economy mode. It controls pump flow to have a better fuel efficiency when working the machine. ECO
mode button is on the keypad. When the ECO mode function is activated, V-ECU controls pump flow to reduce pressure loss
and flow loss.

Figure 1
ECO mode symbol

J1939 Input message

ECU Description
Keypad ECO mode button

Parameters

Code Name Description


PJE Memorize ECO mode state 0 = The ECO mode is engaged by default on machine start up. ECO
mode can be turned ON/OFF by button in the keypad.
1 = When starting the machine it will have the same ECO mode state it
had when the machine was turned off. ECO mode can be turned ON/OFF
by button in the keypad.

Output messages

ECU Description
Keypad ECO mode LED
I-ECU ECO mode symbol
Figure 2
ECO mode button

Function description
When the operator is pressing ECO mode button, the button is illuminated and V-ECU sends ECO mode signal to I-ECU to
display ECO mode symbol with green.

 ECO mode function is only activated on P, H, G1, G2 and G3 mode of the engine speed.
 Parameter PJE controls the ECO mode state when the machine is turned off and on, see above parameter.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Software parameters, 301 Service Information 2014/6/12
description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Software parameters, description


New Incorrectly set parameters may cause malfunction symptoms. Check the parameter values so that these are reasonable
by comparing them to the correct values and limits. Use VCADS Pro to check the parameters.
There are two types of parameters that can be programmed, machine parameters and customer parameters.
Machine parameters are of the accessory type or legal requirements, and requires on-line connection to the Volvo data base
VDA (Vehicle Data Administration) to enable programming.
Customer parameters do not require on-line connection, they can be programmed directly.
NOTE!
Default set parameters in the description can be different according to the options installed on the machine and to the
changes made during machines lifetime.

Engine control unit (E-ECU, MID 128)

Code Titles in VCADS Pro Default set Set range


Description in VCADS Pro Additional explanation
AIZ Fuel consumption, calibration percent 0% from –10 to +10%
A percentage correction value between +10 and -10 is If the real fuel consumption is lower or higher than the
programmed to compensate for any fuel consumption. value shown in Matris or I-ECU, you can adjust the
For example the value 4 means an increase of 4% and displayed value to the real value. The cause of the
-4 a decrease of 4%. differences could be fuel quality, working conditions,
The following formula gives the correction value: driver behavior, machine conditions.
(consumption according to the customer’s fuel records Example: real consumption, 95L
- consumption according to display) / consumption displayed consumption, 100L
according to display x 100 = the correction value. Adjust, -5%
Round off the value to the nearest integer. When the
compensation is complete reset the mileage and fuel
data.
AJJ Crank reference offset 0.0 -3.0 – 3.0 degrees
Calibration of the crank position during production –
compensates for production tolerances in the sensor
wheel and when installing the engine speed (RPM)
sensor.
ATJ Injector cylinder 1, calibration Trim code –
The new trim code must be programmed after –
replacing the unit injector. The trim code (T/C) is
shown on the injector label and consists of up to 9
characters.
ATK Injector cylinder 2, calibration Trim code –
The new trim code must be programmed after –
replacing the unit injector. The trim code (T/C) is
shown on the injector label and consists of up to 9
characters.
ATL Injector cylinder 3, calibration Trim code –
The new trim code must be programmed after –
replacing the unit injector. The trim code (T/C) is
shown on the injector label and consists of up to 9
characters.
ATM Injector cylinder 4, calibration Trim code –
The new trim code must be programmed after –
replacing the unit injector. The trim code (T/C) is
shown on the injector label and consists of up to 9
characters.
ATN Injector cylinder 5, calibration Trim code –
The new trim code must be programmed after –
replacing the unit injector. The trim code (T/C) is
shown on the injector label and consists of up to 9
characters.
ATO Injector cylinder 6, calibration Trim code –
The new trim code must be programmed after –
replacing the unit injector. The trim code (T/C) is
shown on the injector label and consists of up to 9
characters.
AU Max engine speed stationary 2300 600 – 2600 r/min

CNS Maximum torque limit 5000 0 – 4000 Nm


Limits the engine torque value over the entire rpm –
range.
DN Cust data, Fleet ID – –
The customer unit number can be entered here. –
(maximum 13 characters). The Fleet ID can be set via
the cluster menu.
DX Cust data, engine ECU password – –

FXE Engine governor type 0 = MinMax –
Engine governor type –
IUI Request reset when faulty component replaced 0 = No –
Request reset when faulty component replaced. May –
only be used when performance related component
has been replaced and after given fault search
instructions without exception.
JAA The PTO is drive shaft 0 = No –
If true, disables the drive line protection (torque limit –
for low vehicle speed) when the PTO is engaged (PTO
mode or PTO Switch On from VP2 / PID89).
JVL Injector cylinder 1, calibration E3 Glitch trim Trim code –
The new trim code must be programmed after –
replacing the unit injector. The trim code (T/C) is
shown on the injector label and consists of up to 13
characters. Used for E3 Glitch trim.
JVM Injector cylinder 2, calibration E3 Glitch trim Trim code –
The new trim code must be programmed after –
replacing the unit injector. The trim code (T/C) is
shown on the injector label and consists of up to 13
characters. Used for E3 Glitch trim.
JVN Injector cylinder 3, calibration E3 Glitch trim Trim code –
The new trim code must be programmed after –
replacing the unit injector. The trim code (T/C) is
shown on the injector label and consists of up to 13
characters. Used for E3 Glitch trim.
JVO Injector cylinder 4, calibration E3 Glitch trim Trim code –
The new trim code must be programmed after –
replacing the unit injector. The trim code (T/C) is
shown on the injector label and consists of up to 13
characters. Used for E3 Glitch trim.
JVP Injector cylinder 5, calibration E3 Glitch trim Trim code –
The new trim code must be programmed after –
replacing the unit injector. The trim code (T/C) is
shown on the injector label and consists of up to 13
characters. Used for E3 Glitch trim.
JVQ Injector cylinder 6, calibration E3 Glitch trim Trim code –
The new trim code must be programmed after –
replacing the unit injector. The trim code (T/C) is
shown on the injector label and consists of up to 13
characters. Used for E3 Glitch trim.
LVG ACM Burner states – –
The state of the ACM (Aftertreatment Control Module) –
burner:
1 : Burner state wait
2 : Burner state igniter cleaning
3 : Burner state preparation
4 : Burner state ignition
5 : Burner state warm up
6 : Burner state ramp up
7 : Burner state temp control
8 : Burner state cool down
9 : Burner state shut down
10 : Burner state error
11 : Burner state power down
12 : Burner state active diagnostics
LVH ACM Burner Status – –
The state of the ACM (Aftertreatment Control Module) –
burner:
1 : Burner status ok
2 : Burner status lost frame
3 : Burner status too low engine speed
4 : Burner status too high exhaust temp
5 : Burner status too high heat temp
6 : Burner status too high DPF temp
7 : Burner status too high flame temp
8 : Burner status controllability error
9 : Burner status ignition high flame temp
255 : Burner status major error
YA Idle target engine speed 730 rpm 0–2000 rpm
Idle speed, desired value Normal value: 700-900 rpm

Instrument control unit (I-ECU, MID 140)

Code Titles in VCADS Pro Default set Set range


Description in VCADS Pro Additional explanation
ABP Anti-theft protection – OFF/ON
Activates the anti-theft device that prevent starting of This parameter is also valid for V-ECU
the vehicle
ABQ Anti-theft protection PIN code 0123 0–9999
Select PIN code for anti-theft device This parameter is also valid for V-ECU
NOTE!
The first ZEROs are not displayed. e.g. '0001' is shown
as '1' while '1000' is shown as '1000'.
BGR Central greasing installed – OFF/ON
Automatic lubrication system installed and activated This parameter enables the diagnostic of the automatic
lubrication system so that the operator gets an error
message on the display when the automatic lubrication
system has an error.
FZA Connect JS pattern option – OFF/ON
Connect joystick pattern option This parameter enables the diagnostic of the control
lever's pattern changer and the symbols on the display
which pattern mode is selected “BHL” or “SAE ISO”.
HXY Option Overload – OFF/ON
Option Overload With this parameter the overload warning is activated.
HXZ Option X1/X3 Pin Code – OFF/ON
Option X1/X3 Pin Code With this option the operator has to type in a pin code
when he want to change the setting for the X1 working
tool or X3 settings in the hydraulic menu of the I-ECU.
IAA X1/X3 Pin Code 0123 0–9999
X1/X3 Pin Code Select PIN code for X1 or X3 settings.
NOTE!
The first ZEROs are not displayed. e.g. '0001' is shown
as '1' while '1000' is shown as '1000'.

IKN Overload boom cylinder pressure setting 270.00 0–65535.00 kPa


Overload starting pressure Active overload warning if boom cylinder pressure is
higher than this valve
IKM Proportional switch control lever installed – OFF/ON
Indicates control lever with proportional switch This parameter sets the default setting for X1 or X3 to
proportional. (Only use if proportional control lever is
installed!)
IKO Quick fit installed – OFF/ON
Connect the quick fit option. –
ITQ No. of Cameras installed – 0–10
No. of Cameras installed Values higher than 4 are not valid for wheeled
excavator.
ITR Theft Deterrent Time Delay 30 sec 0–9000 sec
After shutdown, the vehicle can be restarted within this –
time limit without identification.
IZT X1 special attach type - 0–3
Show whether special attach installed and type if This parameter is also valid for V-ECU
attached.
0: SA not installe
1: Double acting
2: Single acting with Bucket
3: Single acting without Bucket
JEP Fuel tank type - 1–5
Option fuel tank type Fuel level sensor ( = fuel sender) represents the height
of the fuel in the tank. This parameter is used to reflect
different shapes and size of tanks so that the cluster
shows exact volume-based value.
1 : EC700C, 2 : EC140C, 3 : ECR235C, 4 : ECR145C, 5 :
ECR305C
MZU Long life hydraulic oil type 250 0–250
Initial interval time setting is different by hydraulic oil This parameter is set at first and cannot change
type. Parameter value means service interval hour.
250 : Long life hydraulic oil type
Caretrack control unit (W-ECU, MID 142)

Code Titles in VCADS Pro Default set Set range


Description in VCADS Pro Additional explanation
IGU Satellite Modem – OFF/ON
The parameter activates satellite modem function for For the machines which is in the region where can not
Caretrack. This function also needs hardware to be use GSM communication.
installed.
ON: Satellite modem installed.
OFF: Satellite modem not installed.
IHA GSM Modem – OFF/ON
The parameter activates GSM Modem function for For the machine which is in the region where it can use
Caretrack. GSM communication.
ON: GSM Modem is used for Caretrack
communication.
OFF: GSM Modem is not used for Caretrack
communication
JDC CARETRACK Power Supply Options – 0–1
Activates functionality for Care Track to communicate Recommended if satellite communication is installed.
without key-dependent power supply.
0: The Care Track control unit need key-dependent
power supply to communicate.
1: The Care Track control unit communicates without
key-dependent power supply. The battery disconnect
switch must be turned on.
NOTE!
When the parameter is set to 1 the control unit
consume current which should be taken in
consideration when battery disconnect switch is turned
on.

Climate control unit (ECC MID 146)

Code Titles in VCADS Pro Default set Set range


Description in VCADS Pro Additional explanation
GYC Air conditioning installed – 0–1
Air conditioning installed Describes if the machine is equipped with air
conditioning unit
0 : not installed, 1 : installed
GYP Air Condition cycling level 4 0–250
Defines the temperature cycling levels of AC The temperature after the evaporator is defined by a
0 : not used reference value. In order to prevent ice formation on
1 : levels are 3 and 7 °C the evaporator the AC will shut off when temperature
2 : levels are 2 and 5 °C falls below the “low” level and AC will turn on again
3 : levels are 4 and 8 °C when temperature rises above the “high” level. The
4 : levels are 1 and 6 °C “low” and “high” levels are defined with this “AC
cycling level” parameter. The reasons for having these
different cycling levels are:

 To prevent ice formation on the evaporator at


geographic places where the climate is warm
and has high humidity (e.g. Florida). In this
case the levels can be high.
 To speed up the cooling performance. In this
case the levels should be low. This can only be
done at geographic places with dry climate.
HGO Enable Fan Lim Door Open – 0–1
Limit fan speed when cab door open This parameter defines that the fan (cab blower) speed
is decreased when the cab door is open.
0 : not enabled, 1 : enabled
HGP Enable Model Based Diagnosis – 0–1
Activate model based diagnosis With this parameter you can “add on” additional
diagnosis.
0: No “add on”. The ECU is only doing the normal built
in diagnosis.
1: Make diagnosis of duct temperature, heat failure,
water valve and blower.
NOTE!
Not applicable for wheeled excavator

HSZ Pump for recirculation of water – 0–1


Pump for recirculation of water This parameter is set when water recirculation pump is
installed, needed for the function “Cab heat timer”
0 : not installed
1 : installed
NOTE!
Parameter HSZ and HXD are used together.

HXD Heater Installed – 0-250


0: Heater core not installed This parameter is set for machines where heater core is
1: Heater core installed installed
0: Heater core not installed
1: Heater core installed
NOTE!
Parameter HSZ and HXD are used together.

Vehicle control unit (V-ECU, MID 187)

Code Titles in VCADS Pro Default set Set range


Description in VCADS Pro Additional explanation
ABP Anti-theft protection – OFF/ON
Activates the anti-theft device that prevent starting of This parameter is also valid for I-ECU.
the vehicle.
BFJ Connect X1 flow control – OFF/ON
Connect X1 flow control This parameter enables the limitation of the max. X1
flow which was set in the X1 tool settings in the I-ECU.
(The option must be installed.)
This parameter is always set if there is X1 option.
BFQ Connect travel alarm – OFF/ON
Connect travel alarm This parameter enables the travel alarm when
travelling. The travel alarm can be turned off
immediately with the switch on the keypad.
BNJ Float position, function – OFF/ON
Option equipment Float position function installed YES The option must be installed.
= 1; NO = 0
CVS Connect X1 two way switch – OFF/ON
This option allows you to use the X1 function with two The option must be installed.
pressure lines by choosing which line (or both) you
want to have pressure on.
FYV Connect X1 proportional control – OFF/ON
Connect X1 proportional valve control This parameter is always set with proportional switch
control lever (IKM)
FYW Connect X1 one-way switch – OFF/ON
Connect X1 single-way switch This parameter allows you to use the X1 function with
one pressure lines
FYX Connect X1 presetting pressure – OFF/ON
Connect X1 presetting pressure This parameter enables the limitation of the max. of X1
pressure. X1 pressure is set in the X1 tool settings in
the I-ECU.
FYY Connect X3 On/Off control – OFF/ON
Connect X3 On/Off valve control The option must be installed.
FYZ Connect X3 proportional control – OFF/ON
Connect X3 proportional valve control This parameter is always set with proportional switch
control lever (IKM)
FZA Connect JS pattern option – OFF/ON
Connect joystick pattern option This parameter enables the diagnostic of the control
lever's pattern changer and the symbols on the display
which pattern mode is selected “BHL” or “SAE ISO”.
This parameter is also valid for I-ECU
HNI Connect X1 single acting - OFF/ON
Connect X1 single acting The option must be installed.
HOI Connect X1 2–pump - OFF/ON
Connect X1 2–pump The option must be installed.
HOJ Connect X1 pedal - OFF/ON
Connect X1 pedal The option must be installed.
HOK Connect dozer blade - OFF/ON
Connect dozer blade The option must be installed.
HOL Connect X2 - OFF/ON
Connect X2 The option must be installed.
HOQ Boost remaining time 9 sec 3–255 sec
Boost lasting time This parameter defines the time how long the power
boost function will be active when pressing the power
boost switch on the control lever.
NOTE!
For wheeled excavator this time should not be longer
than 30 sec.

IAK Oil cooler type - 0–1


Oil cooler type This parameter is set depending on the oil cooler type.
1: Modine oil cooler
2: AKG oil cooler
IIN 1 switch control lever installed - OFF/ON
Indicates control lever 1 switch The option must be installed.
IIO 4 switch control lever installed - OFF/ON
Indicates control lever 4 switch The option must be installed.
IKM Proportional switch control lever installed - OFF/ON
Indicates control lever 3 switch with proportional The option must be installed.
switch This parameter is also valid for I-ECU
IZT X1 special attach type - 0–3
Show whether special attach installed and type if 1. Similar to proportional control + double acting
attached. combination in standard option. Diagnostics for the
0: SA not installe proportional input/output components are not
1: Double acting disabled in case of field modification of the
2: Single acting with Bucket components.
3: Single acting without Bucket 2. Similar to 1 switch control + single acting
combination. Flow rate request for harvest tool is
inputted through 2 piece boom RCV sensor.
3. Similar to 1 switch control + single acting
combination. Flow rate request for harvest tool is
inputted through bucket RCV sensor and bucket spool
control the flow.
1 : type A, 2way control, 2 : type B, 1way inter conflux,
3 : type C, 1way harvest
JEN Swing alarm installed – OFF/ON
When swing alarm is installed on the machine, the
vehicle buzzer sounds whenever swing operation is
implemented. This option is used to warn the people
who work around the machine because the swing
radius is usually larger than the width of the machine.
JGX Reversible fan installed – 0–1
Reversible airflow direction control in hydraulic oil/ The option must be installed.
engine coolant cooling system.
0: This equipment don't have reversible fan.
1: This equipment have reversible fan.
JGY Reversal interval time at auto mode 60 min 20–120 min
Reversal rotation interval time at auto 1 mode in the Defines the time between the reversible cycles in auto
reversible fan. mode.
JGZ Reversal time at manual mode 60 sec 20–180 sec
Reversal rotation time of reversible fan at manual Defines the time how long the fan runs in reversible
mode. direction.
JHA Fan clutch installed - OFF/ON
If this parameter is set, V-ECU requests the fan speed
(RPM) from E-ECU to control the fan clutch. This is for
the control unit to know if the machine has fan clutch.
LBR Connect X3 ON/OFF solenoid - OFF/ON
0: This equipment does not have an X3 ON/OFF X3 ON/OFF option is of two types and one is operated
solenoid valve. by a proportional valve and the other is a operated by
1: This equipment have an X3 ON/OFF solenoid valve. solenoid valve. This parameter defines X3 is acting by
solenoid valve.
LFL Cooling System Selection - 0–1
Cooling system can be divided into 2 types: “tropical” Standard cooling system is based on 40°C and tropical
and “standard” cooling system. cooling system is based on 47°C or 50°C.
0: Standard cooling system will be adapted. The cooling fan speed is different between the 2 types
1: Tropical cooling system will be adapted. of cooling systems.
LUH Engine control mode with power max switch - OFF/ON
The machine has two types of engine control mode.
One is I2 mode to H mode (9 steps) and the other is I2
mode to P mode (10 steps: add power max mode)
This parameter is used to set when the power max
switch is installed on the machine for using power max
mode.
0: This is used when the machine doesn't have power
max mode and power max switch.
1: This is used when the machine has power max mode
and power max switch.
FAU Automatic engine shut off - OFF/ON
Activation of the function automatic engine shut off.
The function automatically shuts off the engine after
being idle for a certain time. See parameter FAV for
engine shut off time.
FAV Automatic engine shut off, time 5 2–50 min
Setting of time in minutes until automatic engine shut
off . The function automatically shuts off the engine
after being idle for the selected time.
NFZ Reduced torque 100 (100 %)
Reduced torque when operating in high altitude.
Torque setting 50 to 100 %, step: 5
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


General fault diagnosis 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
information
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]EXC, EC220D L [GB]

General fault diagnosis information


The section entitled "Troubleshooting" describes how troubleshooting is performed of symptoms and malfunctions related
the electrical system. Information regarding the different functions of electrical components, measurement values, and
possible malfunction detection is also available.
The basis for all fault diagnosis is that a fault, symptom or function disturbance has been recorded.
Faults can be indicated by:

 flashing red central warning lamp


 buzzer sounding
 flashing amber central warning lamp
 error texts in the display panel
 an error symptom is detected.

Different actions should be taken depending on the manner in which the fault is indicated.

 For faults resulting in:


Flashing amber central warning lamp - promptly inspect the cause during following stop.
 For faults resulting in:
Flashing red central warning lamp - stop the machine immediately and investigate the cause of the fault!

WARNING
Continued operation following a malfunction indication may result in damage to persons and property.

It is of the utmost importance to determine the cause of the fault as quickly as possible when one is suspected or found.
The first step in fault diagnosis is to collect information from the operator regarding the fault symptom. Afterwards, attempt
to localise the cause of the fault by performing checks in a specific order, see 302 Troubleshooting strategy.
To facilitate and make troubleshooting more effective, there is a number of tools available, e.g., diagnostics section in
PROSIS and VCADS Pro service tool, see 302 Troubleshooting tools.

WARNING
During troubleshooting and all work with the electrical system, carefully follow all instructions in Electrical system,
work instructions.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Troubleshooting strategy 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Troubleshooting strategy
The basis for all troubleshooting is that a malfunction, symptom or defect is noticed. Troubleshooting strategy and
procedures are illustrated in the following flow chart.

Start

Basic data collection, see 302 Collection of basic data.

Check for error messages. Error texts found?

YES
NO

 Note error messages.


 Troubleshoot using error code description, see diagnostics section in PROSIS.
 Repair the defect/malfunction.
 Activate the concerned component or function.
 Read-out of error messages. Problem solved?

YES NO
OK Perform parameter check, see 301 Software parameters, description. Any parameters incorrectly set?

YES
NO
Re-program parameter. Problem solved?

YES NO

OK Troubleshoot using additional information.[ 1] 

The included steps in the troubleshooting strategy are described below.

1. Basic data collection. The basis for all troubleshooting is a symptom or malfunction. In order to establish a basis
for troubleshooting, data should be collected about the symptom/malfunction.
A data collection model is available as 302 Collection of basic data.
2. Error messages give a clear indication of what has caused the symptom or malfunction. Therefore, read off error
messages from the information display unit before troubleshooting is started. For information about error
messages' design, see 302 Information display, check.
NOTE!
If new or repeated error messages are generated during troubleshooting, then these must be solved first before
continuing to troubleshoot.

A. If error message is generated, troubleshooting shall be performed according to the diagnostics section in
PROSIS.
B. Error messages are registered and compared with new or recurring error messages.
C. To verify that the problem has been repaired, the appropriate machine components/functions must be
activated to allow the control unit to conduct a self-diagnosis and display new or recurring error
messages. The machine should be started and the component/function should be activated in order to
ensure that a self-diagnosis is conducted.
D. Error messages are examined to verify that the symptom/malfunction has been repaired and to ensure
that no additional defects have occurred as a result of the repair procedure.

3. Parameters are checked to make sure that reasonable values are set. See 301 Software parameters, description.

[ 1]Additional information includes wiring diagrams, function descriptions and component troubleshooting.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Lead and connector checks 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Lead and connector checks


General
An important part of electrical system fault diagnosis is lead and connector checks, which can provide the cause of
malfunctions in the form of loose connections or damaged electrical leads.
NOTE!
Before troubleshooting leads and connectors is conducted, the appropriate fuses should be checked.

Checking should be performed with multimeter, multi-pin breakout box, and cable adapters, see
302 Special tools for troubleshooting.

For repairs of electrical cabling and connectors, see separate Service manual: CABLES AND CONNECTORS.
Refer to the wiring diagrams to find suitable test points.

NOTICE
The following should be observed when working on electrical systems.

 Testing should not be conducted by sticking objects through electrical lead insulation.
 Exercise caution while testing with a test cable in connectors to avoid damage to or widening of connector pins and
sleeves.

NOTE!
For troubleshooting of information bus and control bus, see diagnostics section in PROSIS.

Connector and cable terminal checks


For all tests and checks during which connectors are dismantled, connectors and cable terminals should be visually checked
as follows:

1. Look for cable terminal oxidation. Oxidation can impair the contact.
2. Check for cable terminal damage, correct placement in the insulator and that the leads are correctly connected to
the terminals.
3. Check for good mechanical contact in the cable terminals. Use a separate cable terminal for checking.

Figure 1
Connector, mechanical contact check

Open circuit, check


Open circuits in electrical cables and cable harnesses can be caused by chafing due to friction, pressure due to squeezing
and tension load. Checks for open circuits are conducted as follows:

1. Dismantle the appropriate connector in both ends of the cable harness.


2. Conduct a resistance test between the lead ends. The resistance should be ≈ 0 Ω for an open circuit.
3. Shake the cable harness and pull lightly on the connectors simultaneously during testing to find possible open
circuits.

Figure 2
Check for open circuit with resistance testing

Figure 3
Troubleshooting open circuit

Short circuit to ground, check


A short circuit between the power supply lead and ground often leads to fuse failure. A check for short circuit to ground is
conducted as follows:

1. Ignition in position 1.
2. Close all breakers, activate circuit functions and check if any fuses are tripped.
3. Dismantle the appropriate connector to the circuit components so they do not to affect the test.
4. Resistance test between lead and ground. The resistance should be ∞ Ω for a lead without short circuit to ground.

Figure 4
Check for short circuit to ground (frame ground connection) with resistance testing
Figure 5
Basis for test of short circuit to ground (frame ground connection)

Short circuit to voltage, check


A short circuit between a lead and voltage often leads to fuse failure.

1. Test the voltage with a multimeter on suitable circuit points while the switch is connected and the sensor is
activated.
The voltage value is dependent on several parameters. See wiring diagram, signal description and component
information.
2. Dismantle the appropriate connector in both ends of the cable harness.
Resistance test between the leads that can be short-circuited with each other. The resistance should be ∞ Ω for
leads which are not cross short-circuited.

Figure 6
Check for short circuit to voltage with resistance testing

Figure 7
Basis for test of short circuit to voltage

Contact resistance and oxidation, check


Loose contacts or temporary recurring malfunctions can be difficult to diagnose and are often caused by corrosion,
vibrations of poorly connected leads.
Dampness in the connectors can also cause contact problems as well as damaged pins or sleeves.
Resistance in the connectors and leads should be ≈ 0 Ω. Some resistance, however, can occur due to corrosion in the cable
terminals.
If the contact resistance is too large, function disruption can occur. The amount of resistance that may occur without
disruption varies according to the circuit load.
To check contact resistance and oxidation, see Connector and cable terminal checks.

NOTICE
Shake the cable harness and pull lightly on the connectors while measuring to find eventual loose connections.

Figure 8

Pins and sleeves, cleaning

1. Open the battery disconnect switch.


2. Clean the connectors using compressed air.
3. Spray the connectors with contact spray. Avoid spraying for preventive purposes.
4. Use compressed air once again on the connectors.

Figure 9
Connectors, spraying with contact spray
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Collection of basic data 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Collection of basic data


General
Collection of basic data is the first step in all troubleshooting. This is done to quickly get an improved overall picture of how
the problem shows up.
In addition to information about the excavator and customer, it is important to gather as much information as possible with
regards to the circumstances and sequence of events when the malfunction occurred.
Often, the operator can provide valuable information regarding the circumstances when the malfunction occurred. The
operator is almost always the one who notices a malfunction first.
Since it is seldom possible to recreate the experienced problems, without having exactly the same conditions, the
information from the operator is of great importance in order to be able to make correct evaluations for continued
troubleshooting.
Interview the operator using the following questions.
Note the answers in writing and keep them together with the work order.
The operator should be able to answer the following questions:
General data

 Customer information
 Information about the dealer
 Operator
 Machine specifications:

 Machine
 Serial number
 Operating hours
 Engine type
 Engine number
 Model year
 Delivery date

 Have any error codes been generated?

Description of malfunction or symptom

 Describe the malfunction.


 When did the malfunction occur?
 How was the malfunction noticed and what happened just before it was noticed?
 Does the malfunction reappear?
 How often does the malfunction occur?
 For how long does the malfunction last when it occurs?
 Does the malfunction always occur during the same conditions, and what are those conditions?
 Does the operator have an idea of what may be the probable cause of the malfunction?
 Does the problem still exist?

Engine information

 Under what operating conditions does the malfunction occur?


 External circumstances that affect the malfunction?
 Is the engine difficult to start?
 Is there abnormal smoke development?
 Are there abnormal sounds from the engine?
 Have changes in fuel consumption, oil consumption or engine power been confirmed?
 What type of fuel is used?
 Are additives used in the fuel? If yes, which ones?
 What previous repairs, adjustments/service have been done to the engine?
 Other information?
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


VCADS Pro service tool 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]EXC, EC220D L [GB]

VCADS Pro service tool


General

Figure 1
VCADS Pro computer

The following is a brief description of the VCADS Pro service tool.


The name VCADS Pro is short for Vehicle Computer Aided Diagnostic System Professional.
Design of VCADS Pro

Figure 2
Initial display

VCADS Pro contains programs for:

 Testing components and functions


 Downloading software for control units
 Storing performed work operations on job card

Operations
Figure 3
Example, tests and programming possibilities

Under Operations, there are several tests and programming possibilities divided according to function group.
The tests show, for example, sensor values, as well as graphic display of how a signal varies in time.
Programming is used to reprogram control units.
Read-out of error codes

Figure 4
Operations, read-out of error codes

Read-out of error codes from operations, function group 1 - Service and maintenance. To pin-point malfunction causes, it's
advantageous to use the service tool VCADS Pro. From VCADS Pro, it's possible to obtain error codes of the SAE-type, from
which the malfunction cause can be determined, see 302 SAE error codes, translation to error messages, general.
Parameters
Figure 5
Example, read-out parameters

Reading out and programming of parameters is done from operation, function group 1 - Service and maintenance. For more
information on parameters, see 301 Software parameters, description.
Job card

Figure 6
Example, job card

The job card function is used to store work operations that have been performed with VCADS Pro, for example, test results
and results of error code read-outs and programming of parameters. The job card is stored locally in the computer in
question.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Troubleshooting tools 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Troubleshooting tools
Service manual
Service information for troubleshooting is available in the service manual. The different types of information are listed below:

 Instructions for lead and connector checks


A general description of these checks can be found in 302 Lead and connector checks.
 Wiring diagrams
Wiring diagrams are an important aid during troubleshooting and provide lead designation, lead colours and
component and connector designations, etc.
 Component diagram
Supplemental information to the wiring diagrams is available in the form of component lists that illustrate the
location machine components.
 Function descriptions
The purpose of function descriptions is to explain the machine's sub-functions with regards to input and output
signals and association to other functions. Function descriptions are found in the different function groups.
 Error messages and troubleshooting information
The PROSIS diagnostics section contains the error messages' conditions, possible causes, reactions from control
unit, and noticeable symptoms/malfunctions.

VCADS Pro
VCADS Pro is a PC-based service tool which has been developed in order to facilitate the troubleshooting procedure.
Components/functions can be activated and values can be examined with VCADS Pro through the use of tests. Error text
examination can also be conducted using VCADS Pro.
For a description of VCADS Pro, see the separate operator's manual and 302 VCADS Pro service tool.
Display unit

The information display unit is used to read error texts, see 302 Information display, check.
Special tools
302 Special tools for troubleshooting includes tools that recommended when conducting troubleshooting.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Information display, check 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Information display, check


Read-out of information from the figure “Check”

Figure 1

Example – Check Hydraulic system failure

Check
In the figure “Check”, information is shown about which systems or functions to check/troubleshoot. The information is
presented with symbol and explaining text.
To return to previous figure, press [ESC].
For more information, press SELECT, which gives a new figure “Detail info”.
Detail info
The following information is shown under Detail info:

 Fault Active: indicates if the malfunction/error is active or inactive


 Error Code: shows any error code in the form of component designation followed by FMI (failure/error cause). If the
problem cannot be associated to a component designation, the error code is shown instead according to SAE-
standard (e.g., MID128 PID123 FMI12).
 Source: shows which control unit detected the error/failure
 First event: logged date for first time that the failure/error occurred
 Number of events: number of times that the failure/error has been detected
 Last event: last date for failure/error detection
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Conditions when checking 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Conditions when checking


The following checks (measurements) are mostly described using symbols, in order to clarify the conditions and to reduce
reading time. The symbols are described below.

NOTICE
When checking components, i.e. relays and solenoid valves controlled by a control unit, certain conditions must be
fulfilled.

Conditions are described in the function group to which the component belongs.

NOTICE
To avoid changing functioning components, check the connectors with regards to loose connections and oxidation.

See 302 Lead and connector checks.


General symbols

Symbol Description Symbol Description


Battery disconnect Ignition in position 0,
switch in position Off. 1,or 3.

Engine at idle speed, Resistance


ignition in position 1. measurement
Diode measurement Voltage measurement
(DC)
Voltage measurement Component
(AC)

Ground connection

Measuring control unit and cable harness, symbols


Measuring through cable harness to ECU. Component disconnected.

Symbol Description Symbol Description


Measuring in Measuring with
connector with test adapter.
pin.

Checking cable harness, symbols


Measuring cable harness only. Component and ECU disconnected.

Symbol Description Symbol Description


Measuring with multi- Measuring with multi-
pin breaker box and pin breaker box and
test pin. adapter.
Measuring of cable Measuring of cable
harness, short- harness, short-
circuiting to ground. circuiting to ground.

Checking component/cable harness, symbols


Measuring component with or without connected cable harness.

Symbol Description Symbol Description


Measuring with Measuring short-
adapter. circuiting to ground
with adapter.

Measuring against Measuring short-


component with test circuiting to ground in
pins. component with test
pin.

Measuring component Measuring short-


with connected cable circuiting to ground
harness. through cable harness.
ECU disconnected.

Checking sub-system, symbols

Symbol Description Symbol Description


Multi-pin breaker box Two multi-pin breaker
and adapter connected boxes and adapter
between ECU and connected between
cable harness. ECU and cable harness.

Adapter connected Multi-pin breaker box


between component and adapter connected
and cable harness. ECU between ECU and
connected. cable harness. Test
instrument ground to
ground connection.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Special tools for 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
troubleshooting
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Special tools for troubleshooting


The recommended measuring tools for checking electrical cables and components, for example, are listed below.

Part no./Designation Specification


9998699 Adapter Multi-pin breaker box 62 pin with D-SUB connector. The multi-pin
breaker box is universal and can be used for measuring a number of
different connector types.
14576840 Measuring tool The measuring tool is used for measuring V-ECU, connector VA, VB
and VC. This tool includes multi-pin breaker box and adapter cables.
9990062 Cable Extension cable 2.5 m for multi-pin breaker box 9998699.
9993893 Break out harness The adapter cable is used for measuring V-ECU and ECC.
9990014 Break out harness The adapter cable is used for measuring engine control unit (E-ECU)
connector EA and EB.
NOTE!
For active measuring of E-ECU, 2 adapter cables are required.

88890074 Multimeter Multimeter used for fault diagnosis. (Similar multimeters can also be
used)
88890016 Break out harness Adapter cable for measuring against component with 2 pin, 3 pin, 4
pin, 6 pin, 8 pin, or 12 pin connectors. Used together with multi-pin
breaker box 9998699 and template 88890019.
88890019 Template Template for multi-pin breaker box 9998699. Adapted to adapter
cable 88890016.
88830037 Template Template for multi-pin breaker box 9998699. Used together with
9993900 and 88830028.
9990133 Template Used together with 9990020.
88830028 Break out harness The adapter cable is used for measuring I-ECU.
8920-01805 Break out harness The adapter cable is used for measuring flow control valve.
9990025 Break out harness The adapter cable is used for measuring electric distribution box
(EDB) connectors.
9998534 Break out harness Adapter cable for measuring against component with 4 pin
connectors.
9998567 Break out harness Adapter cable for measuring against component with 7 pin
connectors.
88890024 Break out harness Adapter cable for measuring against component with 2 pin, 3 pin, 4
pin and 6 pin connectors.
88890119 Break out harness Adapter cable for measuring against component with 4 different
coded 2 pin connectors.
9990216 Break out harness Adapter cable for measuring against component with 2 pin, 3 pin and
4 pin connectors.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Error codes, build-up 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Error codes, build-up


Display unit
The error codes shown on the display unit, I-ECU are built up from a character combination with the following appearance
and meaning.

Figure 1
Example of error code "Temperature sensor engine oil, too high voltage"

Position 1
Indicates which type of component or function that has generated the error code. Abbreviations are found in the first 2–3
letters of the error codes.

HE Heating element
MA Solenoid valve
PWM Pulse width modulated valve
RE Relay
SE Sensor or monitor
SW Switches

Positions 2a and 2b
States component number where 2a signifies function group and 2b is a consecutive number within the function group.
Position 3
States FMI-code and based on SAE standard J1587. FMI means Failure Mode Identifier and states which type of error that
has caused the error code.

00 Data valid but above normal operating range


01 Data valid but below normal operating range
02 Intermittent or incorrect data
03 Abnormally high voltage or short-circuit to higher voltage
Abbreviated in error code texts "high voltage"
04 Abnormally low voltage or short-circuit to lower voltage
Abbreviated in error code texts "too low voltage"
05 Abnormally low current or open circuit
Abbreviated in error code texts "too low current"
06 Abnormally high current or short-circuit to frame ground
Abbreviated in error code texts "high current"
07 Incorrect reply from mechanical system
Abbreviated in error code texts "mechanical error"
08 Abnormal frequency
09 Abnormal updating rate
10 Abnormally wide variations
11 Unidentifiable malfunction
Abbreviated in error code texts "other error"
12 Defective unit or component
13 Calibration value outside limits
14 Special instructions
15 Reserved for future use

NOTE!
FMI 0 and 1 indicate to values outside normal operating range. These generate an error code with a warning. Warning is
shown on the display unit and through red central warning lamp.

Figure 2
Red central warning

Service tool VCADS Pro


The error codes in VCADS Pro are built up as follows.

Position in Abbreviation Explanation


figure
1 MID Message Identification Description (identification of control unit).
There is a unique number for each control unit.
2 PID Parameter Identification Description (identification of parameter/value).
There is a unique number for each parameter.
PPID Proprietary Parameter Identification Description (Volvo-unique identification of
parameter/value). There is a Volvo-unique number for each parameter.
SID Subsystem Identification Description (identification of component). The SID-number
depends on which control unit (MID) that they are sent from. Each control unit has its
own number series for SID. The exceptions are SID-numbers 151–255 which are
general for all systems.
PSID Proprietary Subsystem Identification Description (Volvo-unique identification of
component).
3 FMI Failure Mode Identifier (identification of failure type).
Figure 3
Error code screen in service tool VCADS Pro

Position 1, MID
Indicates the control unit that generated the error code. Based on SAE standard J1587.

128 Engine electronic control unit


140 Instrument electronic control unit
146 Electronic climate control unit
187 Vehicle electronic control unit

Position 2, PID, PPID, SID, PSID


Indicates the component/parameter that generated the error code. Based on SAE standard J1587.
Position 3, FMI
Indicates the FMI code. FMI means Failure Mode Identifier and the code indicates which type of malfunction has generated
the error code. FMI is based on SAE standard J1587.
Components with Volvo-specific FMI number
For a few components FMI has a Volvo-specific meaning (not according to SAE standard J1587), see for example, error code,
MID187 PPID1319 (MA9103).
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


AL3201, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

AL3201, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-447

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template

Description

Function Supplies the power to the electric system and charges the battery
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈0Ω
31 –

≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
B1+ –
B2+ –

≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
15 –

L – IA10 ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 24 V
IA10 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


BA3101, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

BA3101, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-488

88890074 Multimeter
9990062 Cable
9990014 Break out harness
14576840 Measuring tool

Description

Function Supplies the power to the electric system


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH02
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VA8 – VB70 ≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
VA16 – VB70
EB57 – EA57
EB60 –EA57
≈0Ω
VB70 –

VC48 –
VC61 –
VC70 –

EA57 –
EB58 –

EB59 –
EA61 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


CU9901, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

CU9901, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-117

88890074 Multimeter
9990062 Cable
9998699 Adapter
88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template

Description

Function Supplies the grease


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH20
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
2–

≈0Ω
1–
≈∞Ω
IA3 –

≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
3–
(SW9900, ON)

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ (active)
IA3 –
≈ 0 V (inactive)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


FU18, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

FU18, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-448

14576840 Measuring tool


88890074 Multimeter
9990025 Break out harness
9990133 Template

Description

Function Checks the power supply to proportional valve


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
VC24 –
VC47 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


FU26, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

FU26, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-449

88890074 Multimeter
9990025 Break out harness
9990133 Template
14576840 Measuring tool

Description

Function Checks the power supply to relays and solenoid valves


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
VC1 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


FX1005, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

FX1005, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-289

9990014 Break out harness


9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
9998567 Break out harness

Description

Function Monitors water level in the fuel filter (SE2302)


Preheats the fuel in fuel filter (HE2301)
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
370 Wiring diagram SCH04
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

EB8, feed
EB10, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


2 (SE2302) – 3 ≈ ∞ Ω⁽ᵃ⁾
(SE2302)
≈ 5.0 V
3 (SE2302) –

≈0Ω
2 (SE2302) –

≈∞Ω
3 (SE2302)–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


2 (SE2302) – 3 (SE2302) ≈ 5.0 V

(a) Fuel filter drained of water


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


FX1006, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

FX1006, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-290

9990014 Break out harness


9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
9998534 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures the engine oil level (SE2205) and temperature (SE2202)
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

EA11, signal
EA31, ground
EB3, signal oil level +
EB4, signal oil level –

Measuring SE2202

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


2–4 ≈ Resistance according
to the graph below
≈5V
2–

≈∞Ω
2–

≈0Ω
4–

EA31 – 4 ≈0Ω
EA11 – 2

Verifying SE2202

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EA11 – EA31 ≈ Resistance according
to the graph below

SE2202 resistance values

Oil temp (° C) Oil temp (° F) Resistance


0 32 1.00 kΩ
20 68 1.08 kΩ
60 140 1.24 kΩ
80 176 1.34 kΩ
100 212 1.40 kΩ
120 248 1.47 kΩ

Measuring SE2205

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–3 ≈ 12 Ω ⁽ᵃ⁾

≈∞Ω
1–
3–
EB4 – 1 ≈0Ω
EB3 – 3

Verifying SE2205

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EB3 – EB4 ≈ 12 Ω ⁽ᵃ⁾

(a) at normal oil level and oil temperature 25°C (77°F)


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


FX1007, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

FX1007, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-291

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
9990014 Break out harness
9990216 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures charge-air pressure (SE2508) and temperature (SE2507)


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

EB17, feed
EA22, signal
EA47, signal
EA11, ground

Measuring SE2507

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

≈5V
2–
≈∞Ω
2–

≈0Ω
1–

Verifying SE2507

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EA11 – EA47 ≈ Resistance according
to the graph below

SE2507 resistance values

Air temp. (°C) Air temp. (°F) Resistance Air temp. (°C) Air temp. (°F) Resistance
- 40 - 40 168 kΩ 60 140 1.2 kΩ
- 20 -4 48.4 kΩ 80 176 0.6 kΩ
0 32 16.2 kΩ 100 212 340 Ω
20 68 6.2 kΩ 120 248 195 Ω
40 104 2.6 kΩ 140 284 117 Ω

Measuring SE2508

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–4 ≈ 1.1 V (at normal air
pressure 101 kPa)

≈5V
3–

≈0Ω
1–

≈∞Ω
3–
4–
EA22 – 4 ≈0Ω

Verifying SE2508

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EA22 – EA11 ≈ 1.1 V (at normal air
pressure 101 kPa)

SE2508 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


FX1008, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

FX1008, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-292

88890074 Multimeter
9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
9998534 Break out harness
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures the temperature (SE2501) at the air filter and clogged air filter (SE2502)
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

EB31, signal
EB18, ground

Measuring SE2501

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


3–4 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

≈5V
3–
≈0Ω
4–

≈∞Ω
3–

Verifying SE2501

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EB18 – EB31 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

SE2501 resistance values

Air temperature ( °C) Air temperature ( °F) Resistance (Ω)


0 32 16.4 kΩ
30 86 4.0 kΩ
60 140 1.2 kΩ
90 194 460 Ω
120 248 200 Ω

Measuring SE2502

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 330 Ω

≈ 0.8 x Uᵇᵃᵗ
1–

≈0Ω
2–

≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying SE2502

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EA29 – EA15 ≈3V
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


CU2501, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

CU2501, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-463

88890074 Multimeter
9990062 Cable
9998699 Adapter
88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template

Description

Function Vaporize fuel in the vaporization chamber of burner


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

A13, control signal


A17, control release switch
A18, diagnostic input
A3, + feed

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 24 V
A17 –

A18 – 6 ≈0Ω
A17 – 4
A13 – 3

≈∞Ω
A18 –
A17 –

A13 –

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 0 – 27 V
A17 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


FX1031, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

FX1031, description and measuring


PID174 (pin no. 11), SE2528 (pin no. 23)

Op nbr 302-297

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function PID174, Aftertreatment fuel temperature


SE2528, Aftertreatment injector fuel pressure sensor
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

A51, feed 5 V
A23, signal
A55, ground
A11, signal

Measuring SE2528

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


A51 – A55 ≈ 5.0 V
≈ 5.0 V
3–

≈∞Ω
4–
3–

Verifying SE2528

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


A23 – A55 ≈ 0.5 V

MeasuringPID174

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


2–1 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

≈ 5.0 V
2–

≈0Ω
1–

≈∞Ω
2–

Verifying PID174

Measuring point Correct value Conditions Test method


A11 – A55 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

PID174 resistance values

Temperature ( °C) Temperature ( °F) Resistance (Ω) Voltage (V)


-40 -40 170 0.73
0 32 201 0.84
25 77 220 0.90
50 122 239 0.96
100 212 276 1.08
200 392 349 1.29
300 572 420 1.48
400 752 488 1.64
500 932 554 1.78
600 1112 618 1.91
700 1292 679 2.02
800 1472 738 2.12
850 1562 767 2.18
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


HE2501, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

HE2501, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-001

88890074 Multimeter
9990062 Cable
9998699 Adapter
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Preheats the induction air for the engine


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

EB7, diagnostic signal

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 0.1 – 0.2 Ω Measure directly on the heating coil
A–

≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
30 (RE2501) –

EB7 – 30a (RE2501) ≈0Ω


Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 0.5 Ω
EB7 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


IG2501, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

IG2501, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-301

88890074 Multimeter
9990062 Cable
9998699 Adapter
88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template

Description

Function Vaporize fuel in the vaporization chamber of burner


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

A13, control signal


A17, control release switch
A18, diagnostic input
A3, + feed

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 24 V
A17 –

A18 – 6 ≈0Ω
A17 – 4
A13 – 3

≈∞Ω
A18 –
A17 –

A13 –

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 0 – 27 V
A17 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


CU2503, descripton and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

CU2503, descripton and measuring


Op nbr 302-629

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template

Description

Function Aftertreatment burner ignition system


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

A31, diagnostic signal


A29, signal
A3, feed, 24V
A57, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
4–
≈0Ω
3–

≈∞Ω
A29 –
A31 –

A29 – 2 ≈0Ω
A31 – 1

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 4.5 V
A31 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


MA2301-MA2306, 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
description and measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

MA2301-MA2306, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-002

9990062 Cable
9998699 Adapter
88890074 Multimeter
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Unit injectors for fuel


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
VCADS Pro Test 23712-3 Injectors shut off, manual
High voltage side,
EA59, EA60
Low voltage side,
EA36, EA40, EA44,
EA48, EA52, EA56

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


Injectors ≈ 0.5 Ω
EA36 – EA60 ≈ 1.3 Ω (20 °C)
EA40 – EA60
EA44 – EA60
EA48 – EA59
EA52 – EA59
EA56 – EA59
≈∞Ω
EA59 –
EA60 –

≈ 5.0 V
EA59 –
EA60 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


MA2508, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

MA2508, description and measuring


PSID89

Op nbr 302-635

88890019 Template
14576840 Measuring tool
88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template
88890016 Break out harness
9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
9998534 Break out harness
88890074 Multimeter

Description

Function Controls the Dosing Valve1 for Hydro Carbon Injection metering
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

A36, feed
A40, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 17.5 Ω (20 °C)

A36 – 1 ≈0Ω
≈0Ω
2–

≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


A36 – A40 ≈ 17.5 Ω (20 °C)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


MA2509, descripton and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

MA2509, descripton and measuring


PPID329

Op nbr 302-599

9998534 Break out harness


14576840 Measuring tool
88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template
9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template

Description

Function Controls the fuel actuator for Dosing Valve2


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

A37, feed
A41, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 17.5 Ω (20 °C)

A37 – 1 ≈0Ω
≈0Ω
2–

≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


A37 – A41 ≈ 17.5 Ω (20 °C)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


MA2510, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

MA2510, description and measuring


PPID340

Op nbr 302-492

88890019 Template
14576840 Measuring tool
88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template
88890016 Break out harness
88890074 Multimeter
9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
9998534 Break out harness

Description

Function Supplies the air for cleaning the burner glow


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

A12, feed
A44/A48/A52/A56, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 48 Ω (20 °C)
A12 – 1 ≈0Ω

≈0Ω
2–

≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


A12 – A44 ≈ 48 Ω (20 °C)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


MA2512, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

MA2512, description and measuring


PPID328

Op nbr 302-636

14576840 Measuring tool


88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template
9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
9998534 Break out harness
88890074 Multimeter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template

Description

Function Controls the shut off valve for Hydro Carbon Injection burner
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

A28, feed
A44/A48/A52/A56, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 4.5 Ω (20 °C)
A28 – 1 ≈0Ω

≈0Ω
2–

≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


A28 – A44 ≈ 4.5 Ω (20 °C)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


MA9109, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

MA9109, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-450

88890074 Multimeter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
9998699 Adapter
88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template
9990062 Cable
14576840 Measuring tool

Description

Function Controls the quickfit cylinder


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH17
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 28 Ω (20 °C)
(SW9104, ON)

IA11 – 1 ≈0Ω
≈0Ω
2–

≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 28 Ω (20 °C)
IA11 –
(SW9104, ON)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


MA9116, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

MA9116, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-452

9990062 Cable
14576840 Measuring tool
88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template
9998699 Adapter
88890074 Multimeter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template

Description

Function Controls the 1/2 pump select function for X1


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 28 Ω (20 °C)

VC4 – 1 ≈0Ω

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 28 Ω (20 °C)
VC4 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


MA9117, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

MA9117, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-453

14576840 Measuring tool


9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template

Description

Function Controls the hammer selection function


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 28 Ω (20 °C)

VC10 – 1 ≈0Ω

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 28 Ω (20 °C)
VC10 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


MA9118, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

MA9118, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-454

14576840 Measuring tool


9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template

Description

Function Controls the shear selection function


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 28 Ω (20 °C)

VC57 – 1 ≈0Ω

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 28 Ω (20 °C)
VC57 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


MA9120, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

MA9120, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-455

14576840 Measuring tool


9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template

Description

Function Controls the boom float function


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH17
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 28 Ω (20 °C)

VC32 – 1 ≈0Ω

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 28 Ω (20 °C)
VC32 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


MA9121, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

MA9121, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-456

14576840 Measuring tool


9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template

Description

Function Controls X1, Left


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 28 Ω (20 °C)

VC28 – 1 ≈0Ω

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 28 Ω (20 °C)
VC28 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


MA9122, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

MA9122, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-457

14576840 Measuring tool


9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template

Description

Function Controls X1, Right


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 28 Ω (20 °C)

VC5 – 1 ≈0Ω

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 28 Ω (20 °C)
VC5 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


MA9125, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

MA9125, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-459

14576840 Measuring tool


9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
9998534 Break out harness
88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template

Description

Function Controls the power boost function


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 28 Ω (20 °C)

VC55 – 1 ≈0Ω

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 28 Ω (20 °C)
VC55 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


MID140 PID251, 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
description and measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

MID140 PID251, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-461

88830028 Break out harness


9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
88830037 Template

Description

Function Checks the system clock


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
370 Wiring diagram SCH02
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈0Ω
IA8 –

IA18 –

≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
IA9 –
Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


IA9 – IA8 ≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


MID140 PPID1144, 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
description and measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

MID140 PPID1144, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-462

88830028 Break out harness


14576840 Measuring tool
9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
88830037 Template

Description

Function Checks the function of the operating check clock


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH02
VCADS Pro
Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VC60 – IA15 ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 10 ~ 14 V
IA15 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


MO3301, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

MO3301, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-017

88890019 Template
88890016 Break out harness
88890074 Multimeter
9990025 Break out harness
9990133 Template
9998699 Adapter
14576840 Measuring tool
9990014 Break out harness
9990062 Cable
9990008 Measuring equipment

Description

Function Starts the engine


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


Small screws on the ≈ 14Ω
relay of the starter
motor

≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
30 (RE3301) –
(RE3301, removed)
≈∞Ω
EB29 –

Verifying

EB29 – 87 (RE3301) ≈ 14 Ω
(RE3301, removed)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


PPID1336, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

PPID1336, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-465

9998699 Adapter
88830028 Break out harness
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
14576840 Measuring tool
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
88830037 Template

Description

Function Checks the pattern changer signal


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈∞Ω
1–

≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
1–
≈0Ω
2 (SE9141) – VB22
2 (SE9142) – VB60
2 (SE9141) – IB10
2 (SE9142) – IB11

≈0Ω
3–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
IB10 –
ISO type (active)
VB22 –

≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
IB11 –
B/H type (active)
VB60 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


MA4212, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

MA4212, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-139

14576840 Measuring tool


9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
9998534 Break out harness
88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template

Description

Function Controls the travel function


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 28 Ω (20 °C)

VA13 – 1 ≈0Ω

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 28 Ω (20 °C)
VA13 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


PWM2303, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

PWM2303, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-020

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Controls the common rail fuel control unit


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 4 Ω (20 °C)

EA12 – EA16 ≈ 4.5 V at constant rpm.


Increasing at quick
throttle application.

EA12 – 1 ≈0Ω
EA16 – 2
≈∞Ω
1–

2–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EA12 – EA16 ≈ 4.5 V at constant rpm.
Increasing at quick
throttle application.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


PWM2602, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

PWM2602, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-288

14576840 Measuring tool


8920-01805 Break out harness
88890074 Multimeter

Description

Function Controls the fan clutch solenoid


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH16
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

EB57, feed
EB49, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


3–4 ≈ 21 ~ 32 Ω
EB49 – 3 ≈0Ω
EB57 – 4

≈∞Ω
3–

4–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EB57 – EB49 ≈ 27 Ω (20 °C)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


PWM9109, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

PWM9109, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-466

88890074 Multimeter
14576840 Measuring tool
8920-01805 Break out harness

Description

Function Controls the X1 flow


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 17.5 Ω (20 °C)

VC49 – 1 ≈0Ω
VC50 – 2

≈∞Ω
1–

2–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VC49 – VC50 ≈ 17.5 Ω (20 °C)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


PWM9124, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

PWM9124, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-468

88890019 Template
88890016 Break out harness
88890074 Multimeter
9998699 Adapter
14576840 Measuring tool

Description

Function Controls the X1, shear right-hand proportional function


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 11.5 Ω (20 °C)

VC64 – 1 ≈0Ω
VC65 – 2

≈∞Ω
1–
2–

Verifying
Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method
VC64 – VC65 ≈ 11.5 Ω (20 °C)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


PWM9129, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

PWM9129, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-469

88890074 Multimeter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
14576840 Measuring tool
9998699 Adapter

Description

Function Controls X1 pressure setting function


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 19 Ω (20 °C)

VC19 – 1 ≈0Ω
VC20 – 2

≈∞Ω
1–
2–

Verifying
Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method
VC19 – VC20 ≈ 19 Ω (20 °C)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


PWM9141, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

PWM9141, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-471

88890074 Multimeter
14576840 Measuring tool
8920-01805 Break out harness

Description

Function Controls the pump flow 1


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
VCADS Pro Test 91303-3 - Proportional valve for power changing, amperage, test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 17.5 Ω

VC2 – 1 ≈0Ω
VC3 – 2
≈∞Ω
1–

2–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VC2 – VC3 ≈ 17.5 Ω
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


PWM9142, descripton and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

PWM9142, descripton and measuring


Op nbr 302-611

88890074 Multimeter
14576840 Measuring tool
8920-01805 Break out harness

Description

Function Controls the pump flow 2


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
VCADS Pro Test 91303-3 - Proportional valve for power changing, amperage, test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 17.5 Ω

VC25 – 1 ≈0Ω
VC26 – 2
≈∞Ω
1–

2–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VC25 – VC26 ≈ 17.5 Ω
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


PWM9145, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

PWM9145, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-473

88890019 Template
88890016 Break out harness
88890074 Multimeter
14576840 Measuring tool
9998699 Adapter

Description

Function Controls the X3 left proportional function


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH16
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 11.5 Ω (20 °C)

VC41 – 1 ≈0Ω
VC46 – 2

≈∞Ω
1–

2–

Verifying
Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method
VC41 – VC46 ≈ 11.5 Ω (20 °C)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


PWM9146, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

PWM9146, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-474

88890074 Multimeter
88890019 Template
88890016 Break out harness
14576840 Measuring tool
9998699 Adapter

Description

Function Controls the X3 right proportional function


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH16
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 11.5 Ω (20 °C)

VC43 – 1 ≈0Ω
VC42 – 2

≈∞Ω
1–

2–

Verifying
Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method
VC43 – VC42 ≈ 11.5 Ω (20 °C)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


RE2501, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

RE2501, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-028

88890074 Multimeter
9990014 Break out harness
9990062 Cable
9998699 Adapter

Description

Function Activates the preheating coil


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


86 – 31 ≈ 20 Ω (20°C)

≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
86 –

≈∞Ω
EB25 –
Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ (inactive)
EB25 –
≈ 0 V (active)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


RE3101, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

RE3101, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-476

9990062 Cable
9998699 Adapter
14576840 Measuring tool
9990025 Break out harness
9990133 Template
88890074 Multimeter

Description

Function Activates the battery connection and power cut-off


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


86 – 85 ≈ 305 ~ 335 Ω

VC11 – 86 ≈0Ω
≈∞Ω
VC11 –

≈0Ω
85 –

≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
86 –

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 305 ~ 335 Ω
VC11 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


RE3301, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

RE3301, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-144

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
14576840 Measuring tool
9990025 Break out harness
9990133 Template

Description

Function Enables to activate the starter motor 1st


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


86 – 85 ≈ 315 ~ 345 Ω

VC58 – 86 ≈0Ω
≈∞Ω
VC58 –

≈0Ω
85 –

≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
86 –

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 315 ~ 345 Ω
VC58 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


RE3302, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

RE3302, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-497

88890074 Multimeter
14576840 Measuring tool
9990025 Break out harness
9990133 Template
9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable

Description

Function Enables to activate the starter motor 2nd


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


86 – 85 ≈ 315 ~ 345 Ω

≈0Ω
85 –
≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
86 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


RE4206, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

RE4206, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-477

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
14576840 Measuring tool
9990133 Template
9990025 Break out harness

Description

Function Controls the travel alarm


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH12
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


86 – 85 ≈ 315 ~ 345 Ω

VC36 – 86 ≈0Ω

≈∞Ω
VC36 –
≈0Ω
85 –

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 315 ~ 345 Ω
VC36 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2203, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2203, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-031

88890074 Multimeter
9990062 Cable
9998699 Adapter
9990014 Break out harness
9998534 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures the engine oil pressure


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

EB17, feed 5 V
EB11, signal
EB18, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
1–
≈0Ω
4–

EB11 – 2 ≈0Ω

≈∞Ω
1–
2–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EB11 –EB18 ≈ 0.5 V

SE2203 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2301, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2301, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-032

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
9998534 Break out harness
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures feed pressure after the fuel filter


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

EB17, feed 5V
EB16, signal
EB18, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
1–

≈0Ω
4–
≈∞Ω
1–

2–

EB16 – 2 ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EB16 – EB18 ≈ 0.5 V

SE2301 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2303, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2303, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-034

88890074 Multimeter
9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88830028 Break out harness
88830037 Template
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template

Description

Function Measures the fuel level


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

IA4, feed 5 V
IA12, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

≈5V
1–

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


IA4 – IA12 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

SE2303 resistance values

Display in machine Distance of float (mm) ± 5 Resistance (Ω)


Full tank > 617 82
617 92
596 102
575 112
554 122
533 132
512 142
491 152
470 162
449 172
428 182
407 192
386 202
365 212
344 222

323 232
302 242
281 252
260 262
239 272
218 282
197 292
176 302
155 312
134 322
113 332
92 342
71 352
Empty tank 50 399
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


PWM9156, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

PWM9156, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-656

88890074 Multimeter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
14576840 Measuring tool
9998699 Adapter

Description

Function Controls the travel straight proportional function


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 19 Ω (20 °C)

VC17 – 1 ≈0Ω
VC18 – 2

≈∞Ω
1–
2–

Verifying
Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method
VC17 – VC18 ≈ 19 Ω (20 °C)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2309, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2309, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-035

9990062 Cable
9998699 Adapter
88890074 Multimeter
88830028 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures the fuel pressure in the common rail


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

EA7, feed 5V
EA11, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
3–

≈0Ω
1–

≈∞Ω
3–
≈∞Ω
2–

EA19 – 2 ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EA19 – EA11 ≈ 0.5 V
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


PWM9157, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

PWM9157, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-657

88890074 Multimeter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
14576840 Measuring tool
9998699 Adapter

Description

Function Controls the boom conflux cut proportional function


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 19 Ω (20 °C)

VC68 – 1 ≈0Ω
VC69 – 2

≈∞Ω
1–
2–

Verifying
Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method
VC68 – VC69 ≈ 19 Ω (20 °C)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2512, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2512, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-302

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures charged air cooler temperature


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

EB32, signal
EB18, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

≈5V
1–

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EB32 – EB18 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

SE2512 resistance values

Temperature ( °C) Temperature ( °F) Resistance (Ω)


– 40 – 40 44.3 kΩ
0 32 5.8 kΩ
20 68 2.5 kΩ
40 104 1.2 kΩ
80 176 315 Ω
125 257 98 Ω
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2515, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2515, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-304

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures the EGR differential pressure through Delta P venturi


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

EA7, feed 5 V
EA21, signal
EA11, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
1–

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
3–

1–

EA21 – 3 ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EA21 – EA7 ≈ 0.5 V

SE2515 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2516, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2516, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-305

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures the EGR temperature


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

EB48, feed
EA11, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

≈5V
2–

≈0Ω
1–
≈∞Ω
2–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EB48 – EA11 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

SE2516 resistance values

Temperature ( °C) Temperature ( °F) Resistance (Ω)


– 40 – 40 168.5 Ω
– 30 – 22 176.4 Ω
– 20 –4 184.3 Ω
– 10 14 192.2 Ω
0 32 200.0 Ω
10 50 207.8 Ω
20 68 215.6 Ω
30 86 223.4 Ω
40 104 231.1 Ω
50 122 238.8 Ω
60 140 246.5 Ω
70 158 254.2 Ω
80 176 261.8 Ω
90 194 269.4 Ω
100 212 277.0 Ω
110 230 284.6 Ω
120 248 292.1 Ω
130 266 299.7 Ω
140 284 307.2 Ω
150 302 314.7 Ω
160 320 322.1 Ω
170 338 329.5 Ω
180 356 338.9 Ω
190 374 344.4 Ω
200 392 351.7 Ω
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2519, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2519, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-307

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures differential pressure of DPF


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

A50, feed 5 V
A26, signal
A54, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
3–

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
1–

3–

A26 – 1 ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


A26 – A54 ≈ 0.5 V

SE2519 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2520, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2520, description and measuring


PPID277

Op nbr 302-308

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures the air pump pressure


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

A50, feed 5 V
A47, signal
A54, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
1–

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
3–

1–

A47 – 3 ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


A47 – A54 ≈ 0.5 V

SE2520 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2521, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2521, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-309

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures the exhaust gas temperature before the oxidation catalyst
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

A42, signal
A55, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

≈5V
1–

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


A42 – A55 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

SE2521 resistance values

Temperature ( °C) Temperature ( °F) Resistance (Ω)


0 32 201
25 77 220
200 392 351
400 752 491
600 1112 623
850 1562 774
950 1742 830
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2522, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2522, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-310

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures the exhaust gas temperature after the oxidation catalyst
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

A34, signal
A55, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

≈5V
1–

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


A34 – A55 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

SE2522 resistance values

Temperature ( °C) Temperature ( °F) Resistance (Ω)


0 32 201
25 77 220
200 392 351
400 752 491
600 1112 623
850 1562 774
950 1742 830
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2523, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2523, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-311

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures the Hydro Carbon Injection pressure after Dosing Valve1
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

A51, feed 5 V
A27, signal
A55, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
1–

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
3–

1–

A27 – 3 ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


A27 – A55 ≈ 0.5 V
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2524, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2524, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-312

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures the fuel pressure after Dosing Valve2


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

A50, feed 5 V
A43, signal
A54, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
1–

≈0Ω
4–
≈∞Ω
2–

1–

A43 – 2 ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


A43 – A54 ≈ 0.5 V
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2526, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2526, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-314

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures the exhaust gas back pressure after turbine


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

A51, feed 5 V
A19, signal
A55, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
1–

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
3–

1–

A19 – 3 ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


A19 – A55 ≈ 0.5 V
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2529, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2529, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-317

9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures the burner temperature


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

A39, signal
A55, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

≈5V
1–

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


A39 – A55 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

SE2529 resistance values

Temperature ( °C) Temperature ( °F) Resistance (Ω)


-40 -40 170
0 32 201
25 77 220
50 122 239
100 212 276
200 392 349
300 572 420
400 752 488
500 932 554
600 1112 618
700 1292 679
800 1472 738
850 1562 767
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2703, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2703, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-045

9990062 Cable
9998699 Adapter
88890074 Multimeter
9990014 Break out harness
9990216 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures engine speed on cam shaft


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
VCADS Pro Test 28420-3 Flywheel and camshaft signal, test

Figure 1

EA46, frequency +
EA45, frequency –

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 3.7 kΩ

≈∞Ω
1–
2–

EA46 – 2 ≈0Ω
EA45 – 1
≈∞Ω
1–

2–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EA45 – EA46 ≈ 1.5 ~ 2.0 V AC
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE8701, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE8701, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-479

9993893 Break out harness


9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable

Description

Function Measures the air conditioner refrigerant pressure at the high side
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH10
VCADS Pro
Test

Figure 1

BB88, signal

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 0 Ω (active)

≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
1–

2 – BB8 ≈0Ω
Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ (active)
BB8 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE8702, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE8702, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-059

88890074 Multimeter
8920-01805 Break out harness
14576840 Measuring tool

Description

Function Measures the evaporator temperature


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH10
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

BB50, signal
BB48, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

≈5V
2–

≈0Ω
1–
≈∞Ω
2–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


BB50 – BB48 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

SE8702 resistance values

Air temp. (°C) Air temp. (°F) Resistance


-40 -40 83.1 kΩ
-30 -22 43.4 kΩ
-20 -4 23.7 kΩ
-10 +14 13.5 kΩ
0 +32 8.0 kΩ
+10 +50 4.9 kΩ
+20 +68 3.1 kΩ

+30 +86 2.0 kΩ


+40 +104 1.3 kΩ
+50 +122 0.9 kΩ
+60 +140 0.6 kΩ
+70 +158 430 Ω
+80 +176 310 Ω
+90 +194 230 Ω
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE8705, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE8705, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-328

88890074 Multimeter
8920-01805 Break out harness
14576840 Measuring tool

Description

Function Measures the ambient air temperature


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH10
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

BB51, signal
BB48, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

≈5V
2–

≈0Ω
1–
≈∞Ω
2–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


BB51 – BB48 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

SE8705 resistance values

Air temp. (°C) Air temp. (°F) Resistance


-40 -40 83.1 kΩ
-30 -22 43.4 kΩ
-20 -4 23.7 kΩ
-10 +14 13.5 kΩ
0 +32 8.0 kΩ
+10 +50 4.9 kΩ
+20 +68 3.1 kΩ

+30 +86 2.0 kΩ


+40 +104 1.3 kΩ
+50 +122 0.9 kΩ
+60 +140 0.6 kΩ
+70 +158 430 Ω
+80 +176 310 Ω
+90 +194 230 Ω
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE8706, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE8706, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-060

88890074 Multimeter
8920-01805 Break out harness
14576840 Measuring tool

Description

Function Measures the cab interior temperature


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH10
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

BB26, signal
BB48, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

≈5V
2–

≈0Ω
1–
≈∞Ω
2–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


BB26 – BB48 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

SE8706 resistance values

Air temp. (°C) Air temp. (°F) Resistance


-30 -22 44.3 kΩ
-20 -4 24.2 kΩ
-10 +14 13.8 kΩ
0 +32 8.1 kΩ
+10 +50 5.0 kΩ

+20 +68 3.1 kΩ


+30 +86 2.0 kΩ
+40 +104 1.3 kΩ
+50 +122 0.9 kΩ
+60 +140 0.6 kΩ
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2603, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2603, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-042

9990014 Break out harness


9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter
9998699 Adapter

Description

Function Monitors coolant level


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
VCADS Pro
Test

Figure 1

EB23, signal
EB10, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ ∞ Ω (normal level)
≈ 0 Ω (low level)

≈ 0.8 x Uᵇᵃᵗ
2–

≈0Ω
1–
≈∞Ω
2–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EB23 – EB10 ≈ 0.8 x Uᵇᵃᵗ (normal level)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2604, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2604, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-318

9998699 Adapter
9990014 Break out harness
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter

Description

Function Measures the fan clutch speed


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH16
VCADS Pro Test 91003–3 Cooling fan control, test

Figure 1

EA7, feed 5V
EA35, signal
EA39, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈0Ω
2–
≈5V
5–

1 – EA35 ≈0Ω

≈∞Ω
1–

≈∞Ω
5–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EA35 – EA39 ≈ 2.4 V AC (fan speed,
200rpm
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2606, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2606, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-043

88890074 Multimeter
9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
9990014 Break out harness
9990216 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures coolant temperature in the engine


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

EB27, signal
EB18, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

≈5V
1–
≈0Ω
2–

≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EB27 – EB18 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

SE2606 resistance values

Temp (° C) Temp (° F) Resistance


-40 -40 45.3 kΩ
-20 -4 15.5 kΩ
0 32 5.9 kΩ
20 68 2.5 kΩ
40 104 1.2 kΩ

60 140 0.6 kΩ
80 176 320 Ω
100 212 190 Ω
120 248 110 Ω
140 284 70 Ω
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE2701, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE2701, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-044

88890074 Multimeter
9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
9990014 Break out harness
9990216 Break out harness

Description

Function Measures engine speed on crankshaft


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
VCADS Pro Test 28420-3 Flywheel and camshaft signal, test

Figure 1

EA37, frequency +
EA38, frequency –

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ 0.9 kΩ

≈∞Ω
1–
2–

EA37 – 1 ≈0Ω
EA38 – 2
≈∞Ω
1–

2–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EA37 – EA38 ≈ 21 V AC
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE9121, descripton and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE9121, descripton and measuring


Op nbr 302-617

88890019 Template
88890016 Break out harness
9993893 Break out harness
9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
14576840 Measuring tool
88890074 Multimeter

Description

Function Measures the pressure applied to the Pump 1 discharge.


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

VB15, feed 5 V
VB33, signal
VB57, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
A–

≈0Ω
B–
≈∞Ω
A–

≈∞Ω
C–

VB33 – C ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VB33 – VB57 ≈ 0.5 V

SE9121 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE9122, descripton and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE9122, descripton and measuring


Op nbr 302-618

88890074 Multimeter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
14576840 Measuring tool
9993893 Break out harness
9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable

Description

Function Measures the pressure applied to the Pump 2 discharge.


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

VB15, feed 5 V
VB34, signal
VB57, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
A–

≈0Ω
B–
≈∞Ω
A–

≈∞Ω
C–

VB34 – C ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VB34 – VB57 ≈ 0.5 V

SE9122 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE9123, descripton and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE9123, descripton and measuring


Op nbr 302-619

9990062 Cable
9998699 Adapter
9993893 Break out harness
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
88890074 Multimeter
14576840 Measuring tool

Description

Function Measures the 2nd pressure applied to the control lever, Arm out.
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

VB5, feed 5 V
VB3, signal
VB52, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
A–

≈0Ω
B–
≈∞Ω
A–

≈∞Ω
C–

VB3 – C ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VB3 – VB52 ≈ 0.5 V

SE9123 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE9124, descripton and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE9124, descripton and measuring


Op nbr 302-620

14576840 Measuring tool


88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
9993893 Break out harness
9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter

Description

Function Measures the 2nd pressure applied to the control lever, Bucket.
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
VCADS Pro Test
Tools

Figure 1

VB59, feed 5 V
VB8, signal
VB56, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
A–

≈0Ω
B–
≈∞Ω
A–

≈∞Ω
C–

VB8 – C ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VB8 – VB56 ≈ 0.5 V

SE9124 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE9125, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE9125, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-480

88890074 Multimeter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
14576840 Measuring tool
9993893 Break out harness
9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable

Description

Function Measures the 2nd pressure applied to the control lever, Boom up.
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
VCADS Pro
Test

Figure 1

VB7, feed 5 V
VB30, signal
VB54, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
A–

≈0Ω
B–
≈∞Ω
A–

≈∞Ω
C–

VB30 – C ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VB30 – VB54 ≈ 0.5 V

SE9125 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE9126, descripton and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE9126, descripton and measuring


Op nbr 302-621

9990062 Cable
9993893 Break out harness
9998699 Adapter
14576840 Measuring tool
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
88890074 Multimeter

Description

Function Measures the 2nd pressure applied to the control lever, Swing.
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
VCADS Pro
Test
Tools

Figure 1

VB9, feed 5 V
VB55, signal
VB56, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
A–

≈0Ω
B–
≈∞Ω
A–

≈∞Ω
C–

VB55 – C ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VB55 – VB56 ≈ 0.5 V

SE9126 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE9127, descripton and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE9127, descripton and measuring


Op nbr 302-622

88890074 Multimeter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
14576840 Measuring tool
9993893 Break out harness
9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable

Description

Function Measures the 2nd pressure applied to the control lever, Travel left.
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
VCADS Pro
Test
Tools

Figure 1

VB7, feed 5 V
VB6, signal
VB54, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
A–

≈0Ω
B–
≈∞Ω
A–

≈∞Ω
C–

VB6 – C ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VB6 – VB54 ≈ 0.5 V

SE9127 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE9128, descripton and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE9128, descripton and measuring


Op nbr 302-623

9990062 Cable
9993893 Break out harness
9998699 Adapter
14576840 Measuring tool
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
88890074 Multimeter

Description

Function Measures the 2nd pressure applied to the control lever, Travel right.
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
VCADS Pro
Test
Tools

Figure 1

VB7, feed 5 V
VB29, signal
VB54, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
A–

≈0Ω
B–
≈∞Ω
A–

≈∞Ω
C–

VB29 – C ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VB29 – VB54 ≈ 0.5 V

SE9128 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE9129, descripton and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE9129, descripton and measuring


Op nbr 302-624

88890074 Multimeter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
14576840 Measuring tool
9998699 Adapter
9993893 Break out harness
9990062 Cable

Description

Function Measures the 2nd pressure applied to the control lever, X1.
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
VCADS Pro Test
Tools

Figure 1

VB9, feed 5 V
VB31, signal
VB56, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
A–

≈0Ω
B–
≈∞Ω
A–

≈∞Ω
C–

VB31 – C ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VB31 – VB56 ≈ 0.5 V

SE9129 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE9130, descripton and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE9130, descripton and measuring


Op nbr 302-625

9990062 Cable
9993893 Break out harness
9998699 Adapter
14576840 Measuring tool
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
88890074 Multimeter

Description

Function Measures the 2nd pressure applied to the control lever, X2.
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
VCADS Pro Test
Tools

Figure 1

VB9, feed 5 V
VB32, signal
VB56, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
A–

≈0Ω
B–
≈∞Ω
A–

≈∞Ω
C–

VB32 – C ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VB32 – VB56 ≈ 0.5 V

SE9130 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE9131, descripton and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE9131, descripton and measuring


Op nbr 302-626

14576840 Measuring tool


88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
88890074 Multimeter
9990062 Cable
9993893 Break out harness
9998699 Adapter

Description

Function Measures the 2nd pressure applied to the control lever, Boom down.
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

B7, feed 5 V
B53, signal
B54, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
A–

≈0Ω
B–
≈∞Ω
A–

≈∞Ω
C–

VB53 – C ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VB53 – VB54 ≈ 0.5 V

SE9131 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE9132, descripton and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE9132, descripton and measuring


Op nbr 302-627

9998699 Adapter
9993893 Break out harness
9990062 Cable
14576840 Measuring tool
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
88890074 Multimeter

Description

Function Measures the 2nd pressure applied to the control lever, Arm in.
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

VB5, feed 5 V
VB4, signal
VB52, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
A–

≈0Ω
B–
≈∞Ω
A–

≈∞Ω
C–

VB4 – C ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VB4 – VB52 ≈ 0.5 V

SE9132 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE9401, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE9401, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-481

88890016 Break out harness


14576840 Measuring tool
88890019 Template
9998699 Adapter
88890074 Multimeter

Description

Function Measures the pressure applied to the digging unit for warning the overload
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

VB5, feed 5 V
VB2, signal
VB52, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈5V
A–

≈0Ω
B–
≈∞Ω
A–

C–

VB2 – C ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VB2 – VB52 ≈ 0.5 ~ 3.0 V

SE9401 voltage values

Figure 2
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SID211, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SID211, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-482

88890074 Multimeter
9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Supplies 5V to the sensors


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
VCADS Pro
Test

Figure 1

EB17, Power supply (+5V)


EB18, Ground
EA11, Ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈0Ω
4 (SE2301) –
4 (SE2203) –
1 (FX1007) –
≈5V
1 (SE2301) –

1 (SE2203) –
3 (FX1007) –

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EB17 – EB18 ≈5V
EB17 – EA11
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SW2701, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SW2701, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-147

88890074 Multimeter
14576840 Measuring tool
9998699 Adapter
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Controls the engine rpm according to the work condition


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
VCADS Pro
Test

Figure 1

VB1, feed 24 V
VB35, signal
VB58, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 24 V
1–

≈0Ω
3–
≈∞Ω
1–

3–

2 – VB35 ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VB35 – VB58 ≈ 0.5 ~ 4.5 V
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SW3301, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SW3301, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-265

9990014 Break out harness


14576840 Measuring tool
9998699 Adapter
88890074 Multimeter

Description

Function Supplies the power to the electrical system and activates the engine starter motor
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


30 – BR / ACC / C / R2 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below
X=0Ω
–=∞Ω

≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
30 –
ACC – VA15 ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ (SW3301, ON)
VA15–
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SW9160, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SW9160, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-485

88890074 Multimeter
14576840 Measuring tool
9998699 Adapter

Description

Function Confirms the selection of the quick fit function, and stop the buzzer
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH17
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈∞Ω
1–

2–
3–

4–
5–
6–
2–3 ≈ 0 Ω (SW9160 – 1, 2)
2–1 ≈ ∞ Ω (SW9160 – 0)
5–6
5–4
≈ 24 V
3–

4–

≈0Ω
2–

5–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 0 V (active)
VB20 –
VB43 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SW9161, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SW9161, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-486

9998699 Adapter
14576840 Measuring tool
88890074 Multimeter

Description

Function Controls the X3 proportionally with the left hand control lever
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH16
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

VB10, feed 12 V
VB38, signal
VB14, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈∞Ω
1–

2–
3–
≈ 12 V
1–

3 – VB38 ≈0Ω
Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VB38 – VB14 ≈ 1.5 ~ 7.0 V
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SW9162, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SW9162, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-487

88890074 Multimeter
14576840 Measuring tool
9998699 Adapter

Description

Function Controls the X1 proportionally with the right hand control lever
References 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

VB10, feed 12 V
VB39, signal
VB14, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈∞Ω
1–
2–

3–
≈ 12 V
1–
3 – VB39 ≈0Ω

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VB39 – VB14 ≈ 1.5 ~ 7.0 V
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SAE J1939/CAN control 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
link, description and
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SAE J1939/CAN control link, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-490

9990062 Cable
9990014 Break out harness
9993893 Break out harness
9998699 Adapter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template
88830028 Break out harness
88890074 Multimeter

Description

Function The system control signals are sent on the control link.
NOTE!
The voltage on the control link varies, depending on the intensity of signals on the link. The
measured values should therefore be regarded as guiding values only.

References 370 Wiring diagram SCH02


VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


IA16 – IA6 ≈ 60 Ω⁽ᵃ⁾
IA16 – IA6 ≈ 120 Ω

IA16 – VC16 ≈0Ω


IA6 – VC15
(I-ECU – V-ECU)

IA16 – 34 ≈0Ω
IA6 – 58
(I-ECU – ECC)

IA16 – 4 ≈0Ω
IA6 – 3
(I-ECU – Keypad)

IA16 – EB55 ≈0Ω


IA6 – EB51
(I-ECU – E-ECU)

≈∞Ω
VC15 –

≈∞Ω
VC16 –

(a) Terminating resistors (120 Ω) located internally in E-ECU and I-ECU

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VC16 – VC15 ≈ 0 – 1.5 V
EB51 – EB55

≈ 2.5 – 3.5 V
VC15 –
EB51 –

≈ 1.5 – 2.5 V
VC16 –
EB55 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SAEJ1939/CAN7 Control 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
link, descripton and
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SAEJ1939/CAN7 Control link, descripton and measuring


Op nbr 302-607

14576840 Measuring tool


88890016 Break out harness
9998699 Adapter
88890074 Multimeter
88890019 Template
9993893 Break out harness
9990014 Break out harness
88830028 Break out harness

Description

Function The system control signals are sent on the control link.
NOTE!
The voltage on the control link varies, depending on the intensity of signals on the link. The
measured values should therefore be regarded as guiding values only.

References 370 Wiring diagram SCH05


VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EB52 – EB56 (ACM ≈ 123 Ω
connected, E-ECU
connected)
ACM10 – ACM14 (ACM
connected, E-ECU
connected)
EB52 – EB56 (ACM ≈ 123 Ω
disconnected, E-ECU
connected)
ACM10 – ACM14 (ACM
disconnected, E-ECU
connected)
EB52 – EB56 (ACM ≈ 12 kΩ
Connected, E-ECU
disconnected)

ACM10 – ACM14 (ACM ≈ 43 kΩ


Connected, E-ECU
disconnected)

EB52 – 14 ≈0Ω
EB56 – 10
(E-ECU – ACM)

EB52 – 2 ≈0Ω
EB56 – 3
(E-ECU – MO2502)

EB52 – 1 ≈0Ω
EB56 – 2
(E-ECU – SE2513)

≈∞Ω
EB52 –

≈∞Ω
EB56 –

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


EB52 – EB56 ≈ 0 ~ 1.0 V
ACM10 – ACM14
≈ 2.0 ~ 2.5 V
EB56 –

ACM10 –

≈ 2.5 ~ 3.0 V
EB52 –
ACM14 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Power supply, ACM 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
(Aftertreatment Control
Module), description and
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Power supply, ACM (Aftertreatment Control Module), description and


measuring
Op nbr 302-495

88890074 Multimeter
9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
9990014 Break out harness

Description

Function Voltage feed to after treatment control module (ACM)


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
370 Wiring diagram SCH03
370 Wiring diagram SCH05
VCADS Pro —
Test

Figure 1

A3, key feed


A60 / A61 / A62, feed
A57 / A58 / A59, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
A60 –
A61 –

A62 –

≈0Ω
A57 –
A58 –
A59 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Power supply ECC, 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
description and measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Power supply ECC, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-113

88890074 Multimeter
9998699 Adapter
9993893 Break out harness
88830115 Template
9990062 Cable

Description

Function Voltage feed to climate control unit (ECC).


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
370 Wiring diagram SCH10
370 Wiring diagram SCH11
370 Wiring diagram SCH30
VCADS Pro —
Test

Figure 1

BB19, feed
BB42, feed
BB66, feed
BB69, ground
BB70, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
BB19 –
BB42 –

BB66 –

≈0Ω
BB69 –
BB70 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Power supply I-ECU, 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
description and measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Power supply I-ECU, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-112

88890074 Multimeter
88830028 Break out harness
9998699 Adapter

Description

Function Voltage feed to instrument control unit (I-ECU).


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH02
370 Wiring diagram SCH04
370 Wiring diagram SCH30
VCADS Pro —
Test

Figure 1

IA1, feed
IA9, feed
IA8, ground
IA18, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
IA1 –
IA9 –

≈0Ω
IA8 –

IA18 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Power supply V-ECU, 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
description and measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Power supply V-ECU, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-114

88890074 Multimeter
9998699 Adapter
9993893 Break out harness
88830115 Template
9990062 Cable

Description

Function Voltage feed to vehicle control unit (V-ECU).


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
370 Wiring diagram SCH02
VCADS Pro —
Test

Figure 1

VA8, feed
VA16, feed
VB70, ground
VC48, ground
VC61, ground
VC70, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
VA8 –
VA16 –
≈0Ω
VB70 –

VC48 –
VC61 –
VC70 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Power supply W-ECU, 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
description and measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Power supply W-ECU, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-133

88890074 Multimeter
9998699 Adapter
9993893 Break out harness
9990062 Cable

Description

Function Voltage feed to CareTrack control unit (W-ECU)


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH24
370 Wiring diagram SCH30
VCADS Pro —
Test

Figure 1

14, feed
7, feed
12, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
14 –
7-

≈0Ω
12 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SE9105, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SE9105, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-104

88890074 Multimeter
14576840 Measuring tool
9998699 Adapter
88890016 Break out harness
88890019 Template

Description

Function Measures the hydraulic oil temperature


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
VCADS Pro Test

Figure 1

VB13, signal
VB40, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


1–2 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

≈5V
1–

≈0Ω
2–
≈∞Ω
1–

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


VB13 – VB40 ≈ Resistance according
to the table below

SE9105 resistance values

Oil temp.( °C) Oil temp.(°F) Resistance


-40 -40 3.8 kΩ
-30 -22 3.7 kΩ
-20 -4 3.4 kΩ
-10 +14 3.0 kΩ
0 +32 2.6 kΩ
+10 +50 2.1 kΩ
+20 +68 1.7 kΩ
+30 +86 1.3 kΩ
+40 +104 0.9 kΩ
+50 +122 0.7 kΩ
+60 +140 490 Ω
+70 +158 360 Ω
+80 +176 260 Ω
+90 +194 200 Ω
+100 +212 150 Ω
+110 +230 110 Ω
+120 +248 90 Ω
+130 +266 70 Ω
+140 +284 50 Ω
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SW2506, description and 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SW2506, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-484

9990062 Cable
88890016 Break out harness
88890074 Multimeter
14576840 Measuring tool
9998699 Adapter
88890019 Template

Description

Function Activates/deactivates DPF regeneration


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
VCADS Pro
Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ 24 V
2–

1 – VB46 ≈0Ω
3 – VB19

Verifying
Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method
≈ 24 V⁽ᵃ⁾
VB19 –

≈ 24 V⁽ᵇ⁾
VB46 –

(a) DPF regeneration start switch ON


(b) DPF regeneration stop switch ON
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


SAE J1708/1587 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
Information link,
description and measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

SAE J1708/1587 Information link, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-006

9990014 Break out harness


14576840 Measuring tool
88830028 Break out harness
9998699 Adapter
9990062 Cable
88890074 Multimeter

Description

Function The information link is connected to control units and the service/programming socket. Information and
diagnostic signals are sent on the link.
NOTE!
The voltage on the information link varies, depending on the intensity of signals on the link. The measured
values should therefore be regarded as guiding values only.

References 370 Wiring diagram SCH02


VCADS Pro
Test

Figure 1

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


IA7 – IA17 ≈ ∞ Ω⁽ᵃ⁾

IA7 – VC38 ≈ ∞ Ω⁽ᵇ⁾


IA17 – VC39
(I-ECU – V-ECU)

IA7 – 10 ≈ ∞ Ω⁽ᵇ⁾
IA17 – 11
(I-ECU – ECC)

IA7 – EA34 ≈ 0 Ω⁽ᵇ⁾


IA17 – EA33
(I-ECU – E-ECU)

IA7 – A5 ≈ 0 Ω⁽ᵇ⁾
IA17 – A1
(I-ECU – ACM)

≈ ∞ Ω⁽ᵇ⁾
IA7 –
IA17 –

(a) All ECU is disconnected from the information link except the I-ECU.
(b) All ECU is disconnected from the information link.

Verifying

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


IA7 – IA17 ≈ 2.0 – 4.0 V

≈ 0 – 1.5 V
IA17 –

≈ 3.5 – 4.5 V
IA7 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Power supply E-ECU, 302 Service Information 2014/6/12
description and measuring
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Power supply E-ECU, description and measuring


Op nbr 302-110

88890074 Multimeter
9998699 Adapter
9990014 Break out harness
9990062 Cable

Description

Function Voltage feed to engine control unit (E-ECU).


References 370 Wiring diagram SCH02
370 Wiring diagram SCH03
VCADS Pro —
Test

Figure 1

EB57, feed
EB60, feed
EA57, ground
EB58, ground
EB59, ground
EA61, ground

Measuring

Measuring point Correct value Condition Test method


≈ Uᵇᵃᵗ
EB57 –

EB60 –
≈0Ω
EA57 –

EB58 –
EB59 –
EA61 –
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Battery, description 311 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Battery, description
The battery consists of two 12 V batteries connected in series, which together give 24 V.
The batteries are used to start the engine, supply the current to the electrical components and store the current from the
alternator.

The batteries should be in good condition when troubleshooting the electrical system. If needed, charge the batteries with a
battery charger. If the batteries do not take a charge, check the electrolyte in the battery cell.

WARNING
If a tool touches a cable connected between the positive terminal and the chassis, there is danger that it will cause
sparks. Battery post clamps must be tightly connected. If loosely connected, the terminal may burn or be eroded by
sparks caused by defective contact. Battery acid can burn or blind you. If acid gets on your skin or in your eyes,
immediately wash with plenty of clean water and consult a doctor immediately.

NOTE!
When removing the battery, first disconnect the cable with the black tube from the ground (normally, from the negative (–)
terminal).

NOTE!
Battery power may be lowered under severe cold weather. In this case, warm up the batteries and start the engine.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Battery, storage 311 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Battery, storage
Batteries gradually lose their charge through self-discharge, which is dependent on storage temperature and charge level. A
fully charged battery stored in a cool place loses insignificant capacity in a three-month period. A battery that is partially
charged and/or is stored at room temperature loses capacity faster.
Therefore, always store batteries fully charged and as cool as possible, however, not at freezing temperature. During long-
term storage, the battery should be checked periodically and trickle-charged if needed.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Battery charging capacity, 311 Service Information 2014/6/12
checking
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Battery charging capacity, checking


Op nbr 311-001

88890105 Refractometer

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Using the ignition key open the battery disconnect switch cover and turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.

Figure 1
Battery disconnect switch off position

3. Open the battery box cover.

4. Remove the tool box bracket.

Figure 2

1. Tool box bracket

5. Remove the battery cover.


Figure 3

1. Battery cover

6.

Figure 4

1. Electrolyte refilling cap


1). Checking battery and cable connection

 Loosen soiled connection terminals.


 Clean the battery poles (+ and –) and terminals, and grease with an acid-free and acid-resistance grease.
 Ensure that the terminal connections contact well when assembling.

2). Checking the battery voltage

 Check the voltage between positive terminal (+) and negative terminal (–)
If the measured value is below 21 V, replace the batteries.

7. Reinstall the battery cover.

8. Reinstall the tool box bracket.

9. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch.

10. Close the battery disconnect switch cover and lock it.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Battery, charging 311 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Battery, charging
WARNING
Battery charging generates hydrogen gas, which may be explosive. Short-circuiting, an open flame or a spark near
the battery may cause a powerful explosion.

Make sure ventilation is adequate when charging batteries. Never smoke near batteries.

The batteries must be in good condition when troubleshooting the electrical system. Check the battery voltage with a
voltmeter. Also check the electrolyte fluid in the battery cells with a densitometer.
If needed, charge the batteries with a battery charger according to the instructions in the Operator's Manual.

NOTICE
Always turn off the current to the battery charger before disconnecting the charging clamps.

 Batteries may only be charged with a battery charger.


 Check that the battery connections are attached securely and free from rust and dirt.
 Check the voltage when the batteries are at rest, that is, before attempting to start. Each battery must be at least
half-charged.

If the batteries do not charge:

 Check the density in the battery cells.


 Measure the charging voltage between the alternator's B+ connection and the chassis with a voltmeter. Correct
charging voltage is 28.5 ±0.5V .

Charge level Voltage Acid weight g/cm3


-20 °C 0 °C +20 °C +40 °C
Fully charged battery 12.7 V 1.30 1.29 1.28 1.27
Half-charged battery 12.4 V 1.23 1.22 1.21 1.20
Discharged battery 11.6 V and lower 1.14 1.13 1.12 1.11
NOTE!
Difference in density between the cells may not exceed 0.04 g/cm3 .
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Batteries, replacing 311 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Batteries, replacing
Op nbr 311-002

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Using the ignition key open the battery disconnect switch cover and turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.

Figure 1
Battery disconnect switch off position

3. Open the battery box cover.

4. Remove the tool box bracket.

Figure 2

1. Tool box bracket

5. Remove the battery cover.


Figure 3

1. Battery cover

6. Disconnect the ground cable and extension cable and positive cable from battery.

Figure 4

1. Positive Cable
2. Extension cable
3. Ground cable
4. Battery fixing bracket

7. Remove the bracket fixing the batteries.

WARNING
The parts are heavy. Take appropriate safety cautions when handling them.

8. Replace the batteries with new ones.

9. Reinstall the bracket and battery cables to the batteries.


NOTE!
Make sure that the battery terminals are firmly fixed.

10. Reinstall the battery cover.


Tightening torque : 9.8 ± 0.9 Nm (7.2 ± 0.7 lbf ft) (1.0 ± 0.1 kgf m)

11. Reinstall the tool box bracket.

12. Turn ON the battery switch.


13. Close the battery disconnect switch cover and lock it.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Battery disconnector 311 Service Information 2014/6/12
switch, installing new
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Battery disconnector switch, installing new


Op nbr 371-901

1. Place the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Using the ignition key open the battery disconnect switch cover and turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.

Figure 1
Battery disconnect switch off position

3. Open the battery box cover.

4. Remove the tool box and tool box bracket.

Figure 2

1. Tool box bracket

5. Remove the battery disconnect switch protector and key.


Figure 3

1. Battery disconnect switch protector


2. Key

6. Disconnect the positive cable and cable to the starter motor.

Figure 4

1. Positive cable
2. Cable to the starter motor

7. Remove the screws fixing the battery disconnect switch from the bracket.

Figure 5
1. Screw

8. Replace the battery disconnect switch with a new one.

9. Install the cables.

10. Reinstall the battery disconnect protector.

11. Reinstall the tool box bracket and tool box.

12. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch.

13. Close the battery disconnect switch cover and lock it.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Earth lead to battery, 311 Service Information 2014/6/12
replacing
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Earth lead to battery, replacing


Op nbr 311-006

1. Place the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2.

Figure 1

Using the ignition key open the battery disconnect switch cover and turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.

3. Open the battery box cover.

4. Remove the tool box and tool box bracket.

Figure 2

5. Remove the battery cover.


Figure 3

1. Battery cover

6. Remove the ground cable from the battery minus terminal and ground point on the superstructure.

Figure 4

1. Ground cable
2. Ground point

7. Install the new ground cable.

8. Reinstall the battery cover.

9. Reinstall tool box bracket and tool box.

10. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch.

11. Close the battery disconnect switch cover and lock it.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Alternator, description 320 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Alternator, description

Figure 1
Alternator

1. B-
2. B2+
3. B1+, M8, tightening torque;15 Nm (11 lbf ft)
4. Terminal W
5. Terminal L
6. Terminal 15
7. Terminal BS
8. Terminal DFM
9. Regulator
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Charging, description 320 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Charging, description
When the starter motor is activated and the engine starts:

 The alternator generates current to activate all the electrical systems, and the extra current charges the battery.
 After the engine starting, the battery charge warning lamp is turned off because the signal from "L" goes to the I-
ECU. I-ECU recognize charging status.
 The current flows to the hour meter, which operates during engine running condition.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Alternator, test 321 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Alternator, test
Op nbr 321-075

Wire harness test


The following test must be performed with alternator installed, all wiring harness leads connected and the ignition switch
“ON.” Connect a voltmeter from:

1. Alternator “B–” TERMINAL and frame ground.

2. Alternator “B+” TERMINAL and ground (B–).

Figure 1
Alternator

1. B–
2. B2+
3. B1+, M8, tightening torque;15 Nm (11 lbf ft)
4. Terminal W
5. Terminal L
6. Terminal 15
7. Terminal BS
8. Terminal DFM
9. Regulator

3. Alternator five pin connector TERMINAL (5, 6, 7) and ground (B–).


NOTE!
A zero volt reading on either of these tests indicates an open circuit between the voltmeter connection point and
the battery.

4. Repair/replace wiring harness as required.


The following test must be performed with all accessories turned “OFF.” Connect a voltmeter from:

Output voltage test

5. Alternator “B+” TERMINAL (2) and ground.

6. Operate the engine at a low idle.

7. If the voltage is 28 V or more, the voltage regulator is defective.

8. If the voltage is lower than battery voltage, the alternator inner coil is defective.
Remove the alternator and replace it with a new one.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Alternator, replacing incl 321 Service Information 2014/6/12
function check
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Alternator, replacing incl function check


Op nbr 321-002

1. Place the machine in the service position, see 091 Service positions

2. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.

Figure 1

3. Open the engine hood.

4. Turn the belt tension adjusting screw clockwise to loosen the belt tension and remove the belt.

Figure 2

1. Alternator
2. Belt

5. Disconnect the five pin connector, positive battery cable, cable to pre-heater and ground cable.
Figure 3

1. Five pins connector


2. Positive battery cable
3. Cable to pre-heater
4. Ground cable

6. Remove the screw on the upper guard and the screw on the lower mounting guard. Remove the alternator from
the engine.

Figure 4

1. Screw on the upper guard


2. Screw on the lower mounting guard

7. Install the new alternator.

8. Connect the five pin connector, positive battery cable, cable to pre-heater and ground cable.

9. Turn the belt tension adjusting screw clockwise to loosen the belt tension and install the belt and adjust to proper
tension.

10. Close the engine hood.

11. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch.

12. Check the machine operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Starting operation 330 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Starting operation
Power supply

 The negative terminal (–) of battery is grounded to the machine. When the battery disconnect switch is in the OFF
position, the power supply is disconnected.

If the battery disconnect switch is turned to the ON position and the start switch to the OFF position, the current flows in the
following circuits.

 Battery (+) → Starter motor terminal (30:1) → Alternator(B2+)


 Battery (+) → Circuit breaker (FC02, 80 A) → Battery relay (RE3101)

 Fuse (FU01, 10A) → Horn


 Fuse (FU02, 10A) → Socket for option (PO3904)
 Fuse (FU06, 10A) → V-ECU
 Fuse (FU07, 10A) → Pump, manual
 Fuse (FU11, 10A) → Inductive sensor, Voltage converter
 Fuse (FU16, 10A) → Cigarette lighter
 Fuse (FU18, 10A) → V-ECU
 Fuse (FU22, 15A) → Limp home switch
 Fuse (FU27, 15A) → Seat heater
 Fuse (FU34, 10A) → Wiper motor
 Fuse (FU32, 10A) → Quickfit switch (Removable counterweight solenoid for only EC480D)
 Fuse (FU21, 10A) → Travel alarm

 Battery (+) → Circuit breaker (FC02, 80A) → Battery relay (RE3102)

 Fuse (FU04, 20A) → Work light, boom and superstructure


 Fuse (FU09, 15A) → Fuel heater, Water separator heater (option)
 Fuse (FU14, 10A) → Work light, Cab and counterweight
 Fuse (FU19, 10A) → Beacon light
 Fuse (FU26, 10A) → V-ECU, Control lever switch

 Battery (+) → Circuit breaker (FC02, 80A) → Fuse (FU29, 15A) →Socket for option (PO3904)

 Battery (+) → Circuit breaker (FC02, 80A) → Fuse (FU24, 15A) →Start switch, I-ECU (IA9)

When the start switch is turned to the ON position, current flows in the following circuits.

 Start switch terminal (B+) → ACC terminal →

 V-ECU (VA15)
 ECC (19)
 Alternator (15)

 Start switch terminal (B+) → BR terminal → Battery relay (RE3101, RE3102) coil → Ground

 Start switch terminal (B+) → BR terminal → Resistance (R3201)→ Alternator (L), I-ECU warning lamp signal

Engine starting
If the start switch is turned to the START position, the current flows in the following circuits.
 Start switch terminal (B+)
 Terminal C → Start power relay (RE3302) coil → Ground
 V-ECU (VC58) → Start relay (RE3301) → Ground

When start power relay and start relay are operated:

 Fuse (FU22, 15A) → Start power relay (RE3302 )→ Start relay (RE3301) → Start motor relay coil → E-ECU (B29) → E-
ECU ground

Description of start lock, see 301 Engine start.


Description of safe start and stop, see 301 Safe start and stop, description.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Starter switch (engine start 330 Service Information 2014/6/12
switch), replacing
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Starter switch (engine start switch), replacing


Op nbr 334-011

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions

2. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.

3. Open the upper cover on the right-hand control box, see 881 Instrument panel, replacing (right)

4. Disconnect the wire harness connectors from control box wire harness.

Figure 1

1. Key assembly
2. Wire harness connectors

5. Remove the nut securing the starter switch.

6. Replace the switch with a new one.

7. Tighten the nut and connect the wire harnesses.

8. Close the upper cover.

9. Check engine starting.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Starter motor, description 331 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Starter motor, description


The starter motor MO3301 is supplied directly from the battery disconnection switch and has a built-in start relay, which is
supplied with voltage by the control unit E-ECU. The relay RE3301 is controlled by V-ECU when the ignition key SW3301 is
turned to position II.

Figure 1
Starter motor

1. Terminal 30, tightening torque: 24 Nm (17.8 lbf ft)


2. Terminal 50, tightening torque: 1.2 Nm (0.9 lbf ft)
3. Starter motor
4. Solenoid relay
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Starter motor, tests 331 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Starter motor, tests


Op nbr 331-021

Wire harness test


The following test must be performed with starter motor installed, all wiring harness leads connected and the ignition switch
“OFF.” Connect a voltmeter from:

1. Starter motor Terminal 30 and ground.

Figure 1
Starter motor

1. Terminal 30
2. Terminal 50
3. Stater motor
4. Solenoid relay

NOTE!
A zero volt reading on this test indicates an open circuit between the voltmeter connection point and the battery.

2. Repair/replace wiring harness as required.


The following test must be performed with starter motor installed, all wiring harness leads connected and the
ignition switch “Start.” Connect a voltmeter from:

Operating voltage test

3. Starter motor Terminal 50 and ground.


If the voltage is higher than 24 V and engine does not start, the starter motor is defective.

4. Remove the starter motor and replace it with a new one.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Starter motor, replacing 331 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Starter motor, replacing


Op nbr 331-018

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions

2. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.

3. Remove the DPF hood and radiator hood.

Figure 1

1. DPF hood
2. Engine hood
3. Radiator hood

4. Remove the engine room cowl frame with the engine hood using a lifting device.

Figure 2

5. Remove the counterweight, see 716 Counterweight, removing.


6. Remove the screws fixing the frame.

Figure 3

1. Screw

7. Remove the main cable and ground cable from the starter motor.

Figure 4

1. Main cable
2. Ground cable

8. Disconnect the connector of air pump and remove the hose.

Figure 5

1. Hose
2. Connector, MA2532
9. Remove 3 mounting screws and take the starter motor out.

Figure 6

1. Screw

10. Install the new starter motor.

11. Connect the main cable, ground cable and the connector to starter motor.

12. Install the frame.

13. Install the counterweight, see 716 Counterweight, installation.

14. Install the DPF hood, radiator hood and engine hood.

15. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch and check engine starting.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Starter relay, replacing 331 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Starter relay, replacing


Op nbr 331-081

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions

2. Open the side door of the cab rear.

3. Open the cover of the Electrical distribution box.

4. Pull out the starter relay, RE3301.

Figure 1

1. Starter relay, RE3301

5. Replace it with a new one.

6. Close the cover of the Electrical distribution box and side door.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Starter switch, testing 334 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Starter switch, testing


Op nbr 334-002

88890074 Multimeter

1. Turn off the battery disconnect switch.

2. Remove the right-hand control panel.

3. Disconnect the starter switch wires from the control panel main wire harness.

Figure 1
Start switch

4. Use an ohmmeter or a continuity tester to test all positions of the starter switch for continuity at the switch
terminals. Turn the key to each of three switch positions shown in the table. Continuity should exist between the
switch terminals marked with an “X” for each switch position. If no continuity exists, the switch is defective and must
be replaced.

Switch terminal
B+ BR R1 R2 C ACC
Switch OFF X – – – – –
position ON X X – – – X
START X X – X X X
5. Replace it with a new one if the switch is defective. Reconnect the wiring removed in Step 3, and reinstall the
instrument panel.

6. Turn on the battery disconnect switch.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Work lights and extra 350 Service Information 2014/6/12
lights, description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Work lights and extra lights, description


See 370 Wiring diagram SCH07.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Work lighting, replacing 356 Service Information 2014/6/12
one head lamp assy
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Work lighting, replacing one head lamp assy


Op nbr 356-056

1. Park the machine in the service position E, see 091 Service positions

Right side

2. For the right-hand work light, open the battery box cover. and remove the plate protecting work light.

Figure 1

1. Plate

3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the work light.

Figure 2

1. Connector
2. Screw
4. Remove the screw and replace with a new one.

Left side

5. For the left-hand work light, remove the under cover of the lower cab.

Figure 3

1. Under cover

6. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the work light.

Figure 4

1. Connector
2. Screw

7. Remove the screw.

8. Install the work light.

9. Connect the wire harness.

10. Reinstall the under cover and plate.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Work light on cab, 356 Service Information 2014/6/12
installing new
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Work light on cab, installing new


Op nbr 356-904

1. Park the machine position A according 091 Service positions

2. For the work light on the cab upper front, remove the screw.

Figure 1

1. Work light on the cab upper front, left-hand.


2. Screw

3. Install the new head lamp.

4. Adjust the beam direction.

5. Tighten the screw and nut.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Horn, replacing Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Horn, replacing
Op nbr 362-002

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Disconnect the wire-harness connector from the horn.

Figure 1

1. Connector

3. Remove the screws of the horn from the bracket.

Figure 2

1. Screws

4. Install the new one.

5. Connect the wire-harness connector to the horn.

6. Check the horn operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Rotating beacon, replacing Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Rotating beacon, replacing


Op nbr 362-041

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Remove the screw from the bracket.

Figure 1

1. Rotating beacon light


2. Screw

3. Install a new beacon.

4. Check the rotating beacon operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Travel alarm, replacing Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Travel alarm, replacing


Op nbr 362-051

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Remove the under cover of lower engine.

3. Disconnect the connector of the travel alarm and remove the screw fixing the connector.

Figure 1

1. Connector
2. Screw

4. Remove screws fixing the travel alarm.

Figure 2
1. Screw

5. Install a new travel alarm.

6. Connect the wire harness of the travel alarm and install the screw fixing the connector.

7. Reinstall the under cover.

8. Check the travel alarm operation after starting the machine.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Windscreen wiper, 363 Service Information 2014/6/12
replacing controller
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Windscreen wiper, replacing controller


Op nbr 363-091

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.

3. Move the operator's seat to the front position, and fold the backrest forward.

4. Remove plastic casing over the cab fan.

Figure 1

1. Plastic casing

5. Remove two screws fixing the radio cover.

Figure 2

1. Screw
6. Disconnect wire harness connector and antenna cable from radio.

Figure 3

1. Connector
2. Antenna cable

Take out radio cover.

7. Disconnect the connector of auxiliary heater (option).

Figure 4

1. Connector

8. Disconnect the connectors of voltage converter and wiper motor controller.

Figure 5

1. Connector
2. Connector
9. Remove the screw fixing the voltage converter and wiper controller support.

Figure 6

1. Screw

10. Remove the screws fixing the wiper controller.

Figure 7

1. Screw

11. Reinstall a new controller. The installing procedure is the reverse order of removal.

12. Check the wiper controller operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Windscreen wiper front, 363 Service Information 2014/6/12
replacing motor
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Windscreen wiper front, replacing motor


Op nbr 363-002

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Turn off the battery disconnect switch.

3. Remove the washer fluid nozzle from cab front.

Figure 1
Wiper motor

1. Nut
2. Rubber boot
3. Packing
4. Wiper motor swing shaft
5. Fluid nozzle
6. Wiper arm

4. Remove the wiper arm and blade.


NOTE!
Be careful when removing the wiper and blade not to damage the washer fluid nozzle.

5. Remove the nut and rubber boot and packing from the wiper motor swing shaft.

6. Remove the screw fixing the wiper motor cover on the roof and take out the cover.

7. Disconnect the motor wire harness connector from cab wire harness connector.
Figure 2
Motor

1. Wire harness
2. Motor

8. Remove the screws fixing the wiper motor bracket on the cab and take out the motor.

9. Remove the screws fixing motor on the bracket and replace the motor with a new one.

10. Reinstall the screws and other items.

11. Check the wiper motor operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Windscreen wiper, 363 Service Information 2014/6/12
replacing switch
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Windscreen wiper, replacing switch


Op nbr 363-003

1. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.

2. Open cab door and fix it into position.

Figure 1

1. Cab door

3. Lift off the switch assembly from RH control panel and disconnect wire harness connector.

Figure 2

1. Switch assembly

4. Replace with a new switch and connect wire harness connector.


5. Reinstall the switch assembly.

6. Check the switch operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Windscreen flusher pump, 363 Service Information 2014/6/12
replacing
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Windscreen flusher pump, replacing


Op nbr 363-004

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Open left side door in front of radiator and disconnect wire harness connectors.

Figure 1

1. Washer tank assembly


2. Upper washer pump, MO3601
3. Lower washer pump, MO3604
4. Fluid hose
5. Screw

3. Remove the washer fluid hoses.


NOTE!
Prepare a container to collect washer fluid.

4. Remove the screws of washer fluid tank.

5. Remove the pump and replace it with a new one.

6. Reinstall the washer fluid tank

7. Reinstall the hoses and wire harness connectors.

8. Check the washer fluid pump operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Emergency stop switch, 364 Service Information 2014/6/12
description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Emergency stop switch, description


Emergency stop switch (option), waste handler
An emergency stop button is installed in the cab, in the right corner by the front window.
If the button is pressed down, the main current is turned off.
If possible, press the button before leaving the cab in case of fire.

Figure 1
Emergency stop switch (option)

1. Emergency stop switch (option)


2. To cab wire harness
3. From main wire harness
4. From ground
5. From battery minus
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Pre-heating relay, replacing 364 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Pre-heating relay, replacing


Op nbr 364-056

1. Park the machine in service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Open the left side door and turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.

Figure 1

3. Open the engine hood.

4. Remove the two cable harness connectors.

Figure 2

1. Connector
2. Cable

5. Remove the two cables from the terminals.


6. Remove the bolts holding the preheating relay.

Figure 3

1. Bolt

7. Replace with new preheating relay.

8. Reinstall the bolts holding the preheating relay.

9. Reinstall the cables for the preheating relay.

10. Reconnect the two cable harness connectors.

11. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch and check the function of the preheating replay.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Control lockout lever 364 Service Information 2014/6/12
switch, replacing
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Control lockout lever switch, replacing


Op nbr 364-003

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Remove the upper cover of left-hand control box.

3. Remove the screw fixing the control lockout lever and lift out.

4. Remove the screw fixing cover on the limit switch assembly.

5. Remove the screws fixing the limit switch assembly.

6. Disconnect wire harness connector from control box wire harness.

Figure 1

1. Wire harness assembly


2. Control lockout lever
3. Cover
4. Limit switch assembly
5. Screw
6. Washer
7. Screw
8. Washer
9. Washer

7. Replace it with a new limit switch assembly.


NOTE!
When installing the limit switch, turn the switch and make the contacting point is ON.

8. Reinstall the cover and lever.

9. Check the engine starting and attachment operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Start switch, description Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Start switch, description


 The switch selectively routes power supply to various electrical components of the engine start / stop and accessory
circuits.

Figure 1
Start switch

Figure 2
Start switch, circuit

1 START
2 ON
3 OFF
Figure 3
Connection of terminals
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Emergency engine speed Service Information 2014/6/12
control switch, description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Emergency engine speed control switch, description

Figure 1
Emergency engine speed control switch

ES Emergency switch
U Upper position, emergency mode
N Neutral position, normal operation mode
D Down position, emergency engine stop
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Auto/Manual pump control Service Information 2014/6/12
switch, description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Auto/Manual pump control switch, description

Figure 1
Manual pump control switch

A. Pump manual control position


B. Pump automatic control position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


V-ECU, MID 187, changing 366 Service Information 2014/6/12
pre-programmed ECU
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

V-ECU, MID 187, changing pre-programmed ECU


Op nbr 366-066

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Connect VCADS Pro computer to the machine, and perform operation '17030-3 Parameter, programming'.

3. Use the function 'save all parameters to job card'.

4. Turn OFF battery disconnect switch.

5. Move the operator's seat to the front position, and fold the backrest forward.

6. Remove the screws and covers.

Figure 1

1. Screw
2. Cover
3. Cover

7. Disconnect two wiring harness connectors from the V-ECU.


Figure 2

1. Wiring harness connector

8. Remove two screws at the upper side of V-ECU, and loosen two screws at the bottom side of V-ECU.

Figure 4

1. Screws

9. Lift off the V-ECU, and replace it with a new one.

10. Install four screws fixing V-ECU to the cab.

11. Connect two wiring harness connectors to the V-ECU.

Figure 5

1. Wiring harness connectors

12. Fit the plastic casing over the cab fan.


Figure 6

13. Return the operator's seat to the original position.

14. Connect VCADS Pro computer to the machine, and perform operation 17030-3 Parameter, programming'. Now the
customer parameters are changed according to the job card saved at step 2.

15. Start the machine and check that no error messages appear.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


V-ECU, MID 187, changing 366 Service Information 2014/6/12
non-programmed ECU
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

V-ECU, MID 187, changing non-programmed ECU


Op nbr 366-064

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Down load software to VCADS Pro computer for target machine.

3. Connect the VCADS Pro computer to the machine, and perform the operation '36646-3 MID 187 control unit,
programming'.

4. When VCADS Pro 'MID 187 ECU, programming' window appears, follow the instructions for replacing V-ECU.

5. Turn OFF battery disconnect switch.

6. Move the operator's seat to the front position, and fold the backrest forward.

7. Remove the screws and covers.

Figure 1

1. Screw
2. Cover
3. Cover

8. Disconnect two wiring harness connectors from the V-ECU.


Figure 2

1. Screw

Figure 3

NOTE!
Concerning JA connector, 70 pins, pull up the locking device to disconnect it.

NOTE!
Concerning JB connector, 16 pins, pull out the red locking device to disconnect it.

9. Remove two screws at the upper side of V-ECU, and loosen two screws at the bottom side of V-ECU.

Figure 4

1. Screw
10. Lift off the V-ECU, and replace it with a new one.

11. Install four screws for fixing V-ECU to the cab.

12. Connect two wiring harness connectors to the V-ECU.

Figure 5

13. Reinstall the screws of the plastic plate between fan and seat and screws of the cassette cover, and connect the wire
harness connector of outlet and diesel heater switch.

14. Fit the plastic casing over the cab fan.

Figure 6

15. Return the operator's seat to the original position.

16. After replacing V-ECU, press OK button of VCADS Pro operation '36646-3 MID 187 control unit, programming'.
Now VCADS Pro starts the programming of software and parameters to the new V-ECU.

17. Start the machine and check that no error messages appear.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Engine speed control 367 Service Information 2014/6/12
switch, replacing
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Engine speed control switch, replacing


Op nbr 367-075

1. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.

2. Open cab door (1) and fix it into position.

Figure 1

3. Remove screws (1) and open cover (2).


NOTE!
Screw tightening torque: (3.61 ± 0.36 lbf.ft) ( 4.9 ± 0.49 N.m) ( 0.5 ± 0.05 kgf.m)

Figure 2
Instrument panel, right

4. Disconnect connector (1) and remove cover (2).


Figure 3

5. Remove the screw (1), and remove cover (2).


NOTE!
Screw tightening torque: (3.61 ± 0.36 lbf.ft) ( 4.9 ± 0.49 N.m) ( 0.5 ± 0.05 kgf.m)

Figure 4

6. Remove the screws (1), and open the panel (2).

Figure 5

7. Disconnect connector (2) of speed control switch (1).


Figure 6

8. Unlock locking plate (1), and then push out the speed control switch.

Figure 7

9. Install the new speed control switch.


The installation procedure is the reverse order of removal.

10. Check the machine operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Component list: Alternator, 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
batteries, capacitors,
electronic units, voltage
outlet
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Component list: Alternator, batteries, capacitors, electronic units,


voltage outlet
Marking Description Wiring diagram
ACM After treatment control module 370 Wiring diagram SCH02
370 Wiring diagram SCH05
AL3201 Alternator 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
BA3101 Battery 1 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
BA3102 Battery 2 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
E-ECU Engine control unit 370 Wiring diagram SCH02
370 Wiring diagram SCH03
370 Wiring diagram SCH16
I-ECU Instrument control unit 370 Wiring diagram SCH02
370 Wiring diagram SCH04
370 Wiring diagram SCH17
370 Wiring diagram SCH22
V-ECU Vehicle control unit 370 Wiring diagram SCH02
370 Wiring diagram SCH03
370 Wiring diagram SCH08
370 Wiring diagram SCH15
370 Wiring diagram SCH16
370 Wiring diagram SCH17
W-ECU Wireless control unit 370 Wiring diagram SCH24
CU2501 Glow plug ECU 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
CU2503 Ignition plug control unit 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
CU3601 Wiper controller 370 Wiring diagram SCH13
CU8702 Time control unit, diesel heater 370 Wiring diagram SCH11
CU9901 Central lubrication system control unit 370 Wiring diagram SCH20
ECC Electronic climate control unit 370 Wiring diagram SCH10
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Component list, Heating 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
coils
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Component list, Heating coils

Marking Description Wiring diagram


FX1005 Fuel filter, water indication and electrically heated 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
element
HE2501 Element, preheating coil 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
HE2502 Glow plug 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
HE3801 Cigarette lighter 370 Wiring diagram SCH14
HE8501 Seat heater 370 Wiring diagram SCH14
HE8701 Diesel heater, cab (option) 370 Wiring diagram SCH11
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Component list, Lights 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Component list, Lights


Marking Description Wiring diagram
LA3501 Interior light 370 Wiring diagram SCH14
LA3512 Working light, front left, 1st 370 Wiring diagram SCH07
LA3513 Working light, front right, 1st 370 Wiring diagram SCH07
LA3514 Working light, reart right, 1st 370 Wiring diagram SCH07
LA3515 Working light, counterweight 370 Wiring diagram SCH07
LA3521 Working light, front left CAB, 1st 370 Wiring diagram SCH07
LA3522 Working light, front right CAB, 1st 370 Wiring diagram SCH07
LA3533 Working light, left, 3rd 370 Wiring diagram SCH07
LA3534 Working light, right, 3rd 370 Wiring diagram SCH07
LA3601 Rotating warning beacon, 1st 370 Wiring diagram SCH14
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Component list, Solenoid 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
valves
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Component list, Solenoid valves


Marking Description Wiring diagram
MA2301 Unit injector 1 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
MA2302 Unit injector 2 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
MA2303 Unit injector 3 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
MA2304 Unit injector 4 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
MA2305 Unit injector 5 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
MA2306 Unit injector 6 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
MA2508 HCI[ 1]  metering 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
MA2509 DPF burner metering DV2[ 2]  370 Wiring diagram SCH05
MA2510 EPV[ 3]  air mass burner glow plug cleaning 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
MA2512 HCI burner shut off 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
MA2602 Engine fan, rotation direction 370 Wiring diagram SCH16
MA4212 Travel 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
MA8701 Air conditioning compressor 370 Wiring diagram SCH10
MA9108 Boom suspension, extra 2nd 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
MA9109 Quick fit 370 Wiring diagram SCH17
MA9116 1/2 pump select 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
MA9117 Hammer select solenoid 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
MA9118 Shear select 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
MA9120 Boom float 370 Wiring diagram SCH17
MA9121 X1 left (hammer) 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
MA9122 X1 right 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
MA9125 Power boost 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
MA9126 Hydraulic safety 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
PWM2303 MPROP common rail 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
PWM2601 Fan clutch 370 Wiring diagram SCH16
(PWM2602)
PWM9109 X1 main flow control proportional valve 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
PWM9141 Pump power shift 1 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
PWM9142 Pump power shift 2 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
PWM9123 X1 proportional valve 1 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
PWM9124 X1 proportional valve 2 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
PWM9129 Left-hand X1 flow preset 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
PWM9130 Right-hand X1 flow preset 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
PWM9143 Fan motor, hydraulic oil 370 Wiring diagram SCH16
PWM9145 X3 left 370 Wiring diagram SCH16
PWM9146 X3 right 370 Wiring diagram SCH16
PWM9156 Travel straight proportional valve 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
PWM9157 Boom conflux cut proportional valve 370 Wiring diagram SCH08

[ 1]Hydro Carbon injection

[ 2]Dosing Valve

[ 3]Electric Purge Valve


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Component list, Motors 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Component list, Motors


Marking Description Wiring diagram
MO2302 Refueling pump motor 370 Wiring diagram SCH18
MO2502 Burner air pump 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
MO2505 EGR 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
MO3301 Starter motor 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
370 Wiring diagram SCH03
MO3601 Windscreen washer motor 370 Wiring diagram SCH13
MO3602 Windscreen wiper motor 370 Wiring diagram SCH13
MO3603 Windscreen wiper motor, lower 370 Wiring diagram SCH13
MO3604 Windscreen washer motor, lower 370 Wiring diagram SCH13
MO8501 Air suspension 370 Wiring diagram SCH14
MO8701 Cab fan motor 370 Wiring diagram SCH10
MO8703 Air conditioner, intake actuator 370 Wiring diagram SCH10
MO8704 Air conditioner, face actuator 370 Wiring diagram SCH10
MO8705 Air conditioner, foot right-hand actuator 370 Wiring diagram SCH10
MO8706 Air conditioner, foot left-hand actuator 370 Wiring diagram SCH10
MO8707 Air conditioner, mix actuator 370 Wiring diagram SCH10
MO8708 Water pump 370 Wiring diagram SCH11
MO8709 Fuel pump motor, diesel heater (optional) 370 Wiring diagram SCH11
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Component list, Relays 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Component list, Relays


Marking Description Wiring diagram
RE2501 Preheating relay, induction air 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
RE3101 Main relay 1 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
RE3102 Main relay 2 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
RE3301 Starter motor relay, 1st 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
RE3302 Starter motor relay, 2nd 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
370 Wiring diagram SCH03
RE3611 Horn relay 370 Wiring diagram SCH12
RE3701 Spare relay 1st 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
RE3702 Spare relay 2nd 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
RE4206 Travel alarm relay 370 Wiring diagram SCH12
RE8701 Air conditioning unit relay, 1st 370 Wiring diagram SCH11
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Component list, Sensors 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Component list, Sensors


Marking Description Wiring diagram
FX1005 Fuel filter, water indication and electrically heated 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
element (SE2302/HE2301)
FX1006 Engine oil sensor, level and temperature (SE2205/ 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
SE2202)
FX1007 Engine sensor, induction/charge air, temperature 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
and pressure (SE2507/SE2508)
FX1008 Air filter, position monitor and temperature sensor 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
(SE2501/SE2502)
FX1031 HCI 1+2, Fuel pressure and temp bevor HCI 1+2 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
FX1054 Intake throttle MO2503, position SE2535 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
SE2203 Pressure sensor, engine oil 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
SE2301 Pressure sensor, fuel 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
SE2303/SE2304 Fuel level/auto stop sensor 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
SE2309 Pressure sensor, fuel/rail 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
SE1512 Temperature, charge air (CAC) 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
SE2513 NOx 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
SE2515 Pressure sensor, EGR differential pressure 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
SE2516 Temperature sensor, EGR 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
SE2519 Pressure sensor, DPF differential pressure 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
SE2521 Exhaust gas temperature before oxygen catalytic 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
SE2522 Exhaust gas temperature after oxygen catalytic 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
SE2520 Air pump pressure 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
SE2523 HCI pressure DV1 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
SE2524 Pressure after DV2 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
SE2525 Burner temperature 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
(SE2529)
SE2526 Exhaust gas back after turbine 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
SE2532 Hot film mass air flow sensor 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
SE2603 Level monitor, coolant 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
SE2606 Temperature sensor, engine coolant 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
SE2701 Speed sensor, engine, 1st (crankshaft) 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
SE2703 Speed sensor, camshaft (engine) 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
SE3602 Limit switch, upper wiper 370 Wiring diagram SCH13
SE3603 Limit switch, lower wiper 370 Wiring diagram SCH13
SE8301 Position monitor, left door 370 Wiring diagram SCH14
SE8701 Pressure monitor, air conditioning refrigerant 370 Wiring diagram SCH10
SE8702 Temperature monitor, air conditioning refrigerant 370 Wiring diagram SCH10
SE8705 Temperature monitor, ambient 370 Wiring diagram SCH10
SE8706 Temperature monitor, cab 370 Wiring diagram SCH10
SE9105 Temperature sensor, hydraulic oil tank 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
SE9121 Pressure sensor, discharge P1 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
SE9122 Pressure sensor, discharge P2 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
SE9123 Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd arm 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
SE9124 Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd bucket 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
SE9125 Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd boom 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
SE9126 Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd swing 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
SE9127 Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd travel left 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
SE9128 Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd travel right 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
SE9129 Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd X1 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
SE9130 Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd X2 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
SE9131 Pressure monitor, RCV 2nd boom down 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
SE9132 Pressure monitor, RCV 2nd arm in 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
SE9141 Inductive sensor, ISO type control lever 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
SE9142 Inductive sensor, Backhoe type control lever 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
SE9401 Pressure monitor, overload 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
SE9901 Pressure monitor, automatic central lubrication 370 Wiring diagram SCH20
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Component list, Switches 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Component list, Switches


Marking Description Wiring diagram
SW2301 Fuel heater switch 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
SW2302/ Fuel filler pump auto stop switch 370 Wiring diagram SCH18
SW2303
SW2304 Fuel pump switch 370 Wiring diagram SCH18
SW2506 DPF switch 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
SW2701 Engine speed control switch 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
SW2713 Engine limp home switch 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
SW3101 Battery disconnection switch 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
SW3301 Ignition switch 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
SW3503 Interior light 370 Wiring diagram SCH14
SW3504 Working lights, front 370 Wiring diagram SCH07
SW3505 Working lights, rear 370 Wiring diagram SCH07
SW3602 Windscreen wiper, upper 370 Wiring diagram SCH13
SW3603 Windscreen wiper, lower 370 Wiring diagram SCH13
SW3607 Rotating warning beacon, 1st 370 Wiring diagram SCH14
SW3608 Windscreen washer, upper 370 Wiring diagram SCH13
SW3613 Windscreen washer, lower 370 Wiring diagram SCH13
SW3801 Keyboard 370 Wiring diagram SCH02
SW3902 Audio remote control 370 Wiring diagram SCH12
SW4202 Travel speed switch 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
SW9103 Pump manual switch 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
SW9104 Quick fit switch, 1st 370 Wiring diagram SCH17
SW9110 Power max mode switch 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
SW9118 Control lockout lever 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
SW9160 Buzzer stop/confirm switch 370 Wiring diagram SCH17
SW9900 Automatic lubrication switch 370 Wiring diagram SCH20
SWJS4BL Control lever left-hand 4 button switch (SW3609, 370 Wiring diagram SCH12
SW9405, SW9406) 370 Wiring diagram SCH16
SWJSPBL Control lever proportional and switch (SW3609, 370 Wiring diagram SCH12
SW9161, SW9165) 370 Wiring diagram SCH16
SWJS4BR Control lever right-hand 4 button switch (SW9108, 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
SW9163, SW9464, SW9158) 370 Wiring diagram SCH17
SWJSPBR Control lever right-hand proportional and switch 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
(SW9162, SW9108, SW9158) 370 Wiring diagram SCH17
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Component list, Fuses 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Component list, Fuses


Circuit breaker
Breaker Capacity Designation Wiring diagram
FC02 80 A Main fuse 370 Wiring diagram SCH01

Fuses in distribution box


Fuse Capacity Designation Wiring diagram
FC01 150 A Preheating 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
FC03 20 A B+ fuse 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
FC05 30 A Burner air pump 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
FC06 20 A Glow plug ECU 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
FU01 10 A Horn 370 Wiring diagram SCH12
FU02 10 A Power outlet, ECU power 370 Wiring diagram SCH01

FU03 10 A Spare 1 –
FU04 20 A Working light, front 370 Wiring diagram SCH07
FU05 10 A Spare 3 –
FU06 10 A V-ECU (for solenoid valves) 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
FU07 10 A V-ECU 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
FU08 – – –
FU09 15 A Fuel filter, electrically heated element 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
Auto lubrication
FU10 10 A Spare 4 –
FU11 10 A I-ECU 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
Audio, horn, travel alarm
Inductive sensor (ISO/Backhoe type
control lever)
FU12 – – –
FU13 10 A Spare 2 –
FU14 15 A Working light, rear 370 Wiring diagram SCH07
FU15 10 A Spare 5 –
FU16 10 A Cigarette lighter 370 Wiring diagram SCH14
FU17 15 A Fuel refueling pump 370 Wiring diagram SCH18
FU18 10 A V-ECU (for proportional valves) 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
FU19 10 A Rotating warning beacon 370 Wiring diagram SCH14
FU20 15 A Diesel heater, Air conditioner 370 Wiring diagram SCH11
FU21 10 A Travel alarm 370 Wiring diagram SCH12
FU22 15 A E-ECU 370 Wiring diagram SCH03
FU23 – – –
FU24 15 A Ignition switch, I-ECU 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
FU25 15 A Voltage converter for audio and 370 Wiring diagram SCH12
power outlet
FU26 10 A X1 option, Boom float 370 Wiring diagram SCH15
FU27 15 A Air suspension / seat heater 370 Wiring diagram SCH14
FU28 10 A Interior light 370 Wiring diagram SCH14
FU29 15 A W-ECU 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
370 Wiring diagram SCH24
FU30 15 A Spare 6 –
FU31 – – –
FU32 10 A Quick fit 370 Wiring diagram SCH17
FU33 15 A Spare 7 –
FU34 10 A Wiper and washer 370 Wiring diagram SCH13
FU35 30 A ACM 370 Wiring diagram SCH02
FU36 10 A DPF 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Component list, 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Miscellaneous
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Component list, Miscellaneous


Marking Description Wiring diagram
AN3901 Antenna 370 Wiring diagram SCH12
CR3901 Audio 370 Wiring diagram SCH12
IG2505 Ignition plug 1 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
IG2506 Ignition plug 2 370 Wiring diagram SCH05
IM3812 Hour meter 370 Wiring diagram SCH04
PC3601 Socket for VCADS Pro 370 Wiring diagram SCH02
PO3901 Power outlet 28 VDC 370 Wiring diagram SCH14
PO3902 Power outlet 14 VDC 370 Wiring diagram SCH12
PO3904 Socket for communication 370 Wiring diagram SCH02
370 Wiring diagram SCH24
R3201 Resister (220 ohm) 370 Wiring diagram SCH01
RC3903 Rear view camera 370 Wiring diagram SCH22
R9101 Resistor, pump 1, manual 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
R9102 Resistor, pump 2, manual 370 Wiring diagram SCH08
SA3602 Horn, 1st 370 Wiring diagram SCH12
SA3603 Horn, 2nd 370 Wiring diagram SCH12
SA3901 Speaker, left-hand 370 Wiring diagram SCH12
SA3902 Speaker, right-hand 370 Wiring diagram SCH12
SA4206 Travel alarm 370 Wiring diagram SCH12
SO3902 Voltage converter 370 Wiring diagram SCH12
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Control system diagram 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Control system diagram


Figure 1
Control system diagram
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram, electrical 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
distribution box
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram, electrical distribution box


Figure 1
EDB circuit diagram
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Component designations 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Component designations
The components in the electrical system are grouped in sixteen component groups according to standard SS-IEC 750 . The
component group is indicated by a letter according to the following table. Each separate component has a running number
after the letter.

Description Designation
Antenna ANT
Diodes DI
Alternator AL
Sensors and monitors SE
Indicator light LC
Cassette radio CRR
Control unit CU
Lights LA
Solenoid valve MA
Motor MO
Proportional valve PWM
Relay RE
Service connection IS
Horn, speakers SA
Voltage converter SO
Power (electric) source BA
Switches SW
Control unit V-ECU, E-ECU, I-ECU, W-ECU, ECC
Fuses FU
Timers and counters IM
Connections and connectors PO
Heaters HE
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Explanation of wiring 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
diagrams
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Explanation of wiring diagrams

Figure 1
Example of cable and component markings

1. Reference, cable (lead) has permanent connection to wiring diagram SCH11_diesel heater:0 C (Diagram number_
function : coordinates)
2. Component marking
3. Diagram number
4. Cable/lead color, see table below
5. Cable/lead marking
6. Key dependent voltage supply (30, 15A, 15B)
7. Frame grounding point (31GE, 31GF)
8. Splicing point
9. Connector with pin numbers
10. Connection with pin marking
11. Coordinate system

Cable (lead) colors on wiring diagrams are outlined in the following table.
Code & color

Code Color Code Color


BL Blue R Red
BN Brown SB Black
GN Green VO Violet
GR Grey W White
OR Orange Y Yellow
P Pink LG Light green
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Electrical symbols and 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
designations
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Electrical symbols and designations


Designation Symbol Explanation
ACM Control unit
ECC
E-ECU
I-ECU
V-ECU
W-ECU
AL Alternator with charging regulator

Alternator with charging regulator

BA Battery

C Capacitor

CR Radio

Communication radio (two-way radio)

CU Electronic unit

DI Diode
FC Fuse
FU
FX Component with several included functions
HE Heating element

Heating coil seat heating

IM Instrument, i.e. hour meter

LA Light, fixed light


Light, flashing light
LC Light-emitting diode

MA Solenoid valve or PWM-valve for control of oil

MO Electric motor

Starter motor

PO Voltage socket 12 V / 24V

R Resistor
Rheostat

RC Back-up camera

RE Relay

RF Flasher relay

SA Audible signal

Audible signal

Speaker

SE Frequency sensor

Inductive sensor

Level sensor

Temperature sensor

Pressure sensor
Pressure monitor

Mechanical monitor

Level monitor

Angle sensor

SO Voltage converter

SW Single terminal switch with manual on and off

Single terminal switch with manual on and automatic off

Double terminal switch with manual on and off with lock-out

Ignition switch

Mode selector (APS)

Electric lever lock

Ground connection
Ground connection engine block

Twisted cable

Shielded cable
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram
SCH01 Power feeding, Alternator, Battery 370 Wiring diagram SCH01

SCH02 ECU power and communication 370 Wiring diagram SCH02

SCH03 Starting system 370 Wiring diagram SCH03

SCH04 Warning and sensor 370 Wiring diagram SCH04

SCH05 ACM system 370 Wiring diagram SCH05

SCH07 Work light 370 Wiring diagram SCH07

SCH08 Machine control 370 Wiring diagram SCH08

SCH10 Electric climate control unit 370 Wiring diagram SCH10

SCH11 Diesel heater 370 Wiring diagram SCH11

SCH12 Audio, horn and travel alarm 370 Wiring diagram SCH12

SCH13 Wiper and washer 370 Wiring diagram SCH13

SCH14 Seat heater, Beacon light and Cab interior light 370 Wiring diagram SCH14

SCH15 X1 control 370 Wiring diagram SCH15

SCH16 X3 and cooler control 370 Wiring diagram SCH16

SCH17 Quick fit and float 370 Wiring diagram SCH17

SCH18 Fuel refilling pump 370 Wiring diagram SCH18

SCH20 Automatic lubrication system 370 Wiring diagram SCH20

SCH22 Rear view camera 370 Wiring diagram SCH22

SCH24 CareTrack system 370 Wiring diagram SCH24

SCH30 Ground 370 Wiring diagram SCH30


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH30 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH30


Ground
Figure 1
Marking Designation Marking Designation
31GF1 Ground 1, frame 31GC1 Ground 1, cab
31GF2 Ground 2, frame

Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH01 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH01


Power feeding
Figure 1
Wiring diagram SCH01
Marking Designation Marking Designation
AL3201 Alternator FU24 Fuse, 15A, SW3301, I-ECU, AL3201
BA3101 Battery 1 FU29 Fuse, 15A, W-ECU
BA3102 Battery 2 FU02 Fuse, 10A, W-ECU
SW3101 Battery disconnection switch FC01 Fuse, 150A, RE2501
SW3301 Ignition switch FC02 Fuse, 80A, main
MO3301 Starter motor FC03 Fuse, 20A, B+
R3201 Resistor (220 ohm) 31GE1 Ground, engine
RE3101 Main relay 1 31GE2 Ground, engine
RE3102 Main relay 2 31GE3 Ground, engine
RE3701 Spare relay 1 31GF3 Ground, frame
RE3702 Spare relay 2
Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH02 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH02


ECU power and communication
Figure 1
Wiring diagram SCH02
Marking Designation Marking Designation
I-ECU Instrument control unit PC3601 Socket for VCADS pro
V-ECU Vehicle control unit SW3801 Keypad
E-ECU Engine control unit PO3904 Socket for communication
ECC Electronic climate control unit FU35 Fuse, 15A, ACM
ACM Aftertreatment control unit

Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH03 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH03


Starting and Engine speed control system
Figure 1
Wiring diagram SCH03
Marking Designation Marking Designation
FX1005 Fuel filter, water indication and electrically RE3301 Start motor relay, 1st
heated element (SE2302/HE2301)
HE2501 Element, preheating - induction air RE3302 Start motor relay, 2st
MA2301 Injector 1 SE2701 Speed sensor, engine, 1st (crankshaft)
MA2302 Injector 2 SE2703 Speed sensor, camshaft (engine)
MA2303 Injector 3 SW2301 Fuel heater switch
MA2304 Injector 4 SW2701 Engine speed control switch
MA2305 Injector 5 SW2713 Engine limp home switch
MA2306 Injector 6 FU09 Fuse, 15A, CU9901, SW9900, SW2301
PWM2303 MPROP common rail FU22 Fuse, 15A, E-ECU
RE2501 Preheating relay
Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH04 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH04


Warning and sensor
Figure 1
Wiring diagram SCH04
Marking Designation Marking Designation
FX1006 Engine oil sensor, level and temperature SE2516 Temperature sensor, EGR
(SE2205/SE2202)
FX1007 Engine sensor, charge air, temperature and SE2515 Pressure sensor, EGR differential pressure
pressure sensor (SE2507/SE2508)
FX1008 Air filter, position monitor and temperature SE2603 Level monitor, coolant
sensor (SE2501/SE2502)
FX1054 Intake throttle MO2503, position SE2535 SE2606 Temperature sensor, engine coolant
IM3812 Hour meter SE9105 Temperature sensor, hydraulic oil tank
SE2203 Pressure sensor, engine oil SE9141 Inductive sensor, ISO type control lever
SE2301 Pressure sensor, fuel SE9142 Inductive sensor, Backhoe type control lever
SE2303/ Fuel level/auto stop sensor SE9401 Pressure monitor, overload
SE2304
SE2309 Pressure, fuel/rail FU11 Fuse, 10A, SE9141, SE9142, SO3902
SE2512 Temperature, charge air (CAC)
Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH05 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH05


Warning and sensor
Figure 1
Wiring diagram SCH05
Marking Designation Marking Designation
CU2501 Glow plug ECU MO2502 Burner air pump
CU2503 Ignition plug control unit MO2505 EGR
FC05 Fuse, 30A, MO2502 SE2513 NOx
FC06 Fuse, 20A, CU2501 SE2519 Pressure, DPF differential pressure
FU36 Fuse, 15A, DPF SE2520 Air pump pressure
FX1031 HCI 1+2, Fuel pressure and temp after HCI 1 SE2521 Exhaust gas temperature before oxygen
+2 catalytic
HE2502 Glow plug SE2522 Exhaust gas temperature after oxygen
catalytic
IG2505 Ignition plug 1 SE2523 HCI pressure DV1
IG2506 Ignition plug 2 SE2524 Pressure after DV2
MA2508 HCI metering SE2525 Burner temperature
(SE2529)
MA2509 DPF burner metering DV2 SE2526 Exhaust gas back after turbine
MA2510 EPV air mass burner glow plug cleaning SE2532 Hot film mass air flow sensor
MA2512 HCI burner shut off SW2506 DPF switch
Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH07 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH07


Work lights
Figure 1
Wiring diagram SCH07
Marking Designation Marking Designation
LA3512 Working light, front left, 1st LA3533 Working light, left, 3rd
LA3513 Working light, front right, 1st LA3534 Working light, right, 3rd
LA3514 Working light, reart right, 1st SW3504 Working light, front
LA3515 Working light, counterweight SW3505 Working light, rear
LA3521 Working light, front left CAB, 1st FU04 Fuse, 20A, SW3504
LA3522 Working light, front right CAB, 1st FU14 Fuse, 15A, SW3505

Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH08 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH08


Machine control
Figure 1
Wiring diagram SCH08

Marking Designation Marking Designation


MA4212 Travel solenoid valve SE9125 Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd boom
MA9108 Boom suspension, extra –2nd SE9126 Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd swing
MA9125 Power boost solenoid valve SE9127 Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd travel left
MA9126 Hydraulic safety solenoid valve SE9128 Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd travel right
PWM9141 Pump power shift 1 proportional valve SE9130 Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd X2
PWM9142 Pump power shift 2 proportional valve SE9131 Pressure monitor, RCV 2nd boom down
PWM9156 Travel straight proportional valve SE9132 Pressure monitor, RCV 2nd arm in
PWM9157 Boom conflux cut proportional valve SW4202 Travel speed switch
R9101 Resistor, pump 1, manual SW9103 Pump manual switch
R9102 Resistor, pump 2, manual SW9110 Power max mode switch
SE9121 Pressure sensor, discharge P1 SW9118 Control lockout lever
SE9122 Pressure sensor, discharge P2 FU06 Fuse, 10A, V-ECU
SE9123 Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd arm FU07 Fuse, 10A, SW9103, SW9118, V-ECU
SE9124 Pressure sensor, RCV 2nd bucket FU18 Fuse, 10A, V-ECU
Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH10 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH10


Electronic climate controller
Figure 1
Wiring diagram SCH10
Marking Designation Marking Designation
MA8701 Air conditioning compressor solenoid MO8707 Air conditioner, mix actuator
MO8701 Cab fan motor SE8701 Pressure monitor, air conditioning
refrigerant
MO8703 Air conditioner, intake actuator SE8702 Temperature monitor, air conditioning
refrigerant
MO8704 Air conditioner, face actuator SE8705 Temperature monitor, ambient
MO8705 Air conditioner, foot right-hand actuator SE8706 Temperature monitor, cab
MO8706 Air conditioner, foot left-hand actuator

Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH11 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH11


Diesel coolant heater
Figure 1
Wiring diagram SCH11
Marking Designation Marking Designation
RE8701 Air conditioning unit relay, 1st MO8708 Water pump (option)
CU8702 Time control unit, diesel heater (option) MO8709 Fuel pump, diesel heater (option)
HE8701 Diesel heater, cab (option) FU20 Fuse, 15A, CU8702, HE8701

Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH12 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH12


Audio, horn and alarm
Figure 1
Wiring diagram SCH12
Marking Designation Marking Designation
AN3901 Antenna SA4206 Travel alarm
CR3901 Audio SO3902 Voltage converter, 20A
PO3902 Power outlet, 14 VDC SW3902 Audio remote control
RE3611 Horn relay SWJS4BL Control lever left-hand 4 button switch
(SW3609, SW6405, SW6406)

 SW3609, horn switch

RE4206 Travel alarm relay SWJSPBL Control lever left-hand proportional and
switch (SW3609, SW9161, SW9165)

 SW3609, horn switch

SA3602 Horn, 1st FU01 Fuse, 10A, RE3611


SA3603 Horn, 2nd FU25 Fuse, 15A, SO3902
SA3901 Speaker, left-hand FU21 Fuse, 10A, RE4206
SA3902 Speaker, right-hand
Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH13 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH13


Wiper and washer
Figure 1
Wiring diagram SCH13
Marking Designation Marking Designation
CU3601 Wiper controller SW3603 Windscreen wiper, lower (option)
MO3601 Windscreen washer motor SW3608 Windscreen washer, upper
MO3602 Windscreen wiper motor SW3613 Windscreen washer, lower (option)
MO3603 Windscreen wiper motor, lower SE3602 Limit switch, upper wiper
MO3604 Windscreen washer motor, lower SE3603 Limit switch, lower wiper
SW3602 Windscreen wiper, upper FU34 Fuse, 10A, MO3602, CU3601, SW3602,
SW3603, SW3608, SW3613

Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH14 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH14


Seat heater, beacon light, and room light
Figure 1
Wiring diagram SCH14
Marking Designation Marking Designation
HE3801 Cigarette lighter, 28VDC SE8301 Position monitor, left door
LA3501 Interior light SW3503 Interior light switch
LA3601 Rotating warning beacon, 1st SW3607 Rotating warning beacon switch, 1st
MO8501/ Air suspension motor / seat heater PO3901 Power outlet 28VDC
HE8501
FU27 Fuse, 15A, MO8501/HE8501 FU19 Fuse, 10A, SW3607
FU16 Fuse, 10A, HE3801 FU28 Fuse, 10A, SW3503

Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH15 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH15


X1 control
Figure 1
Wiring diagram SCH15
Marking Designation Marking Designation
MA9116 1/2 pump select solenoid valve PWM9124 X1 proportional valve 2
MA9117 Hammer select solenoid valve PWM9129 Left-hand X1 flow preset proportional valve
MA9118 Shear select solenoid valve PWM9130 Right-hand X1 flow preset proportional
valve
MA9121 X1 left solenoid valve (hammer) SE9129 Pressure, RCV 2nd X1
MA9122 X1 right solenoid valve SWJS4BR Control lever right-hand 4 button switch
(SW9108, SW9163, SW9164, SW9158)

 SW9108, boost switch


 SW9163, X1 switch, left-hand
 SW9164, X1 switch, right-hand

PWM9109 X1 main flow control proportional valve SWJSPBR Control lever right-hand proportional and
switch (SW9162, SW9108, SW9158)

 SW9108, boost switch


 SW9162, X1 proportional switch

PWM9123 X1 proportional valve 1 FU26 Fuse, 10A, V-ECU, SWJSPBR, SWJS4BR,


SW9110
Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH16 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH16


X3 and cooler control
Figure 1
Wiring diagram SCH16
Marking Designation Marking Designation
MA2602 Engine fan solenoid valve, rotation direction PWM2601 / Fan clutch solenoid /speed sensor
SE2601
(PWM2602 /
SE2604)
PWM9143 Fan motor proportional valve, hydraulic oil SWJSPBL Control lever left-hand proportional and
switch (SW3609, SW9161, SW9165)

 SW9161, X3 proportional switch

PWM9145 X3 left proportional valve (option) SWJS4BL Control lever left-hand 4 button switch
(SW3609, SW9405, SW9406)

 SW9405, X3 switch, left-hand


 SW9406, X3 switch, right-hand

PWM9146 X3 right proportional valve (option)

Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH17 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH17


Quick fit and float
Figure 1
Wiring diagram SCH17
Marking Designation Marking Designation
MA9109 Quick fit solenoid valve FU32 Fuse, 10A, SW9104
MA9120 Boom float solenoid valve SWJS4BR Control lever right-hand 4 button switch
(SW9108, SW9163, SW9164, SW9158)

 SW9158, boom float switch

SW9104 Quick fit switch, 1st SWJSPBR Control lever right-hand proportional and
switch (SW9162, SW9108, SW9158)

 SW9158, boom float switch

SW9160 Buzzer stop/confirm switch

Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH18 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH18


Fuel refueling pump
Figure 1
Wiring diagram SCH18
Marking Designation Marking Designation
MO2302 Refuelling pump motor SW2304 Fuel pump switch
SW2302/ Fuel filler pump auto stop switch FU17 Fuse, 15A, SW2304, SW2302/SW2303
SW2303

Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH20 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH20


Auto lubrication system
Figure 1
Wiring diagram20
Marking Designation Marking Designation
CU9901 Central lubrication system control unit SW9900 Automatic lubrication switch
SE9901 Pressure monitor, automatic central
lubrication

Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH22 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH22


Rear view camera

Figure 1
Wiring diagram SCH22

Marking Designation Marking Designation


RC3903 Rear view camera (option) IECU Instrument control unit
Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Wiring diagram SCH24 370 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Wiring diagram SCH24


CareTrack system

Figure 1
Wiring diagram SCH24

Marking Designation Marking Designation


WECU Wireless control unit (option) PC3601 Socket for VCADS Pro
PO3904 Socket for communication — —
Figure 2
Component position
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Engine wire harness, 371 Service Information 2014/6/12
replacing
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Engine wire harness, replacing


Op nbr 371-090

Removal

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch and remove the start key before starting to work.

3. Remove the DPF hood and radiator hood.

Figure 1

1. DPF hood
2. Engine hood
3. Radiator hood

4. Remove the engine room cowl frame with the engine hood using a lifting device.

Figure 2
5. Remove the counter weight, see 716 Counterweight, removing.

6. Remove the screws fixing the frame.

Figure 3

1. Screw

7. Remove the under covers below the engine.

Figure 4

1. Under cover

8. Disconnect the connectors.

Figure 5
1. EPV air mass glow plug cleaning, MA2510
2. EGR temperature sensor, SE2516
3. Delta p venturi sensor, SE2531

9. Disconnect the two cable harness connectors.

Figure 6

1. Connector
2. Cable

Disconnect the two cables from the terminals.

10. Disconnect the ignition plug control unit connector and cable.

Figure 7

1. Ignition plug control unit, CU2503


2. Cable
3. Strap clamp

Remove the strap clamp.

11. Disconnect the two connectors and cable.


Figure 8

1. Fuel rail pressure sensor, SE2309


2. 5 pin connector
3. Cable

12. Disconnect the engine oil pressure sensor connector and remove a strap clamp.

Figure 9

1. Engine oil pressure sensor, SE2203


2. Strap clamp

13. Disconnect the connectors.


Figure 10

1. Fuel pressure sensor, SE2301


2. MPROP common rail, PWM2303
3. Engine coolant temperature sensor, SE2606

14. Disconnect the camshaft speed sensor connector and remove two strap clamps.

Figure 11

1. Cramshaft speed sensor, SE2703


2. Strap clamp

15. Disconnect the connectors and remove the screws fixing the cover.

Figure 12

1. Connector
2. Screw

16. Disconnect the connectors.

Figure 13
1. Connector

17. Disconnect the connectors.

Figure 14

1. Burner temperature sensor, SE2525


2. Glow plug, HE2502
3. Charged air sensor, FX1007

18. Remove the cover.

Figure 15

1. Cover

19. Disconnect the connectors.

Figure 16
1. HCI metering DV1, MA2508
2. HCI burner shut off, MA2512
3. Fuel pressure and temperature, FX1031
4. HCI pressure DV2, SE2524
5. HCI pressure DV1, SE2523

20. Remove two covers.

Figure 17

1. Cover

21. Disconnect the connectors.

Figure 18

1. EGR, MO2505
2. DPF burner metering DV2, MA2509
3. Exhaust gas back pressure after turbine, SE2526
4. Burner temperature, SE2525
5. Glow plug control unit, CU2501
6. Connector

22. Disconnect the connectors.


Figure 19

1. Connector
2. EGR, MO2505
3. DPF burner metering DV2, MA2509
4. Exhaust gas back pressure after turbine, SE2526

23. Disconnect the crankshaft speed sensor connector.

Figure 20

1. Crankshaft speed sensor, SE2701

24. Remove the strap clamps.


Disconnect the hot film mass flow sensor connector, burner air pump connector and air pump pressure sensor
connector.
Figure 21

1. Strap clamp
2. Hot film mass air flow sensor, SE2532
3. Burner air pump, MO2502
4. Air pump pressure sensor, SE2520

25. Disconnect the connector.

Figure 22

1. Connector

Installing

26. Reinstall the new wire harness. The installing procedure is the reverse order of removal.

27. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch and check the machine operation.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Electrical distribution box Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Electrical distribution box


WARNING
Before working on the electrical distribution box, the battery must be completely disconnected. It's not sufficient to
turn off the battery disconnect switch as some connections in the electrical distribution box are supplied directly
from the battery.

Relay and fuse, see 370 Component list, Relays and 370 Component list, Fuses.
Figure 1
Electrical distribution box

A: Decal

B: Circuit board
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Fuse, description Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Fuse, description

Figure 1
Fuse unit

NOTICE
Always install a fuse of the same type with the correct amperage rating to prevent electrical system damage from
overload.

Fuse (blade-type) color codes

Amperage rating Color Amperage rating Color


3A Violet 15 A Light blue
4A Pink 20 A Yellow
5A Tan 25 A Natural (White)
7.5 A Brown 30 A Light green
10 A Red

Fuse, continuity test


Fuse failure is often caused by a fine crack in the fuse, and this kind of crack is very hard to detect by visual inspection.
Checking fuse continuity with a tester is far superior to eye inspection.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Relay, description Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Relay, description
Main relay

 RE3101, Main relay 1


 RE3102, Main relay 1

Mini relay

 RE3301, Sstarter motor, 1st


 RE3302, Starter motor, 2nd
 RE8701, Air conditioning unit, 1st
 RE3611, Horn
 RE4206, Travel alarm
 RE2601, Engine fan direction

Troubleshooting
Concerning the relay troubleshooting information, see 370 Component list, Relays.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Instruments and controls, 380 Service Information 2014/6/12
overview
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Instruments and controls, overview


Cab interior

Figure 1
Cab, instruments and controls

1. Instrument control unit I-ECU


2. Right instrument panel
3. Rear instrument panel
4. Left instrument panel
5. Control lever left-hand
6. Optional pedal (straight travel)
7. Travel pedals
8. Travel levers
9. Optional pedal (X1)
10. Control lever right-hand
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Instruments and controls, 380 Service Information 2014/6/12
front instrument panel
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Instruments and controls, front instrument panel

Figure 1
Main instrument (I-ECU) and keypad

Item Description Item Description


1 Central warning lamp 5 Arrow up button
2 Gauge screen 6 Arrow down button
3 Main screen 7 ESC button
4 Indicator screen 8 Selection button

3–A Engine speed screen


3–B Mode screen
3–C Time and HVAC screen
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Instruments and controls, 380 Service Information 2014/6/12
left instrument panel
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Instruments and controls, left instrument panel

Figure 1
Left instrument panel

Item Marking Description


1 SW3902 Audio remote control switch
2 SW9104 Quick fit switch
3 SW9160 Buzzer stop and confirm switch
4 SW3503 Interior light
5 SW2704 Emergency engine stop switch
6 SW9103 Pump manual switch
7 SW9118 Control lockout lever
8 SWJS4BL Control lever left-hand 4 button switch
SWJSPBL Control lever left-hand proportional and switch
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Instruments and controls, 380 Service Information 2014/6/12
right instrument panel
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Instruments and controls, right instrument panel

Figure 1
Right instrument panel

Item Marking Description


1 SW3602 Windscreen wiper, upper
2 SW9110 Power maximum mode switch
3 SW3603 Windscreen wiper switch, lower (optional)
4 SW3608 Windscreen washer switch, upper
SW3613 Windscreen washer switch, lower (optional)
5 SW2701 Engine speed control switch
6 SW2703 Keypad
7 SW3301 Ignition switch
8 SW2506 DPF switch
9 PO3902 Power outlet, 14VDC
10 HE3801 Cigarette lighter, 28VDC
11 SW2301 Fuel heater switch
12 SW3607 Rotating warning beacon switch
13 SW9900 Automatic lubrication switch
14 SW3505 Working light switch, rear
15 SW3504 Working light switch, front
16 SW4202 Travel speed switch
17 SWJS4BR Control lever right-hand 4 button switch
SWJSPBR Control lever left-hand proportional and switch
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Instruments and controls, 380 Service Information 2014/6/12
rear instrument panel
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Instruments and controls, rear instrument panel

Figure 1
Rear instrument panel

Item Marking Description


1 CR3901 Radio and Cassette / CD player (optional)
2 HE8701 Cab auxiliary heater (optional)
3 PC3601 Service socket for VCADS Pro and MATRIS
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Hour meter, replacing 383 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Hour meter, replacing


Op nbr 383-001

1. Place the machine position A according 091 Service positions.

2. Disconnect the battery disconnect switch.

3. Remove the blower from the duct.

Figure 1

1. Blower

4. Disconnect 2 screws fixing the hour meter.

Figure 2

1. Screw

5. Disconnect the hour meter connector.


Figure 3

1. Connector

6. Replace the hour meter with a new one.

7. Reinstall the connector and screws.

8. Reinstall the blower and turn ON the battery disconnect switch.

9. Check the hour meter operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Control lockout lever 386 Service Information 2014/6/12
switch, description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Control lockout lever switch, description


When the control lockout lever is in the up position, the hydraulic system, swing and travel unit will work.
When the control lockout lever is in the down position, the servo pressure is cut off to functions, which are operated with
control levers and pedals.

Figure 1
Control lockout lever switch

1. Wire harness assembly


2. Control lockout lever
3. Cover
4. Limit switch assembly
5. Screw
6. Washer
7. Screw
8. Washer
9. Washer

Figure 2
Limit switch

N.O = Normally open

N.C = Normally closed


COM = Common

NOTE!
Switch mounting torque (M3 X 16 mm): 0.3 kg m (0.2 lbf ft)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Fuel level sender, replacing 386 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Fuel level sender, replacing


Op nbr 386-011

1. Place the machine position A according 091 Service positions.

2. Remove cable ties fixing the fuel level sender cable.

Figure 1

1. Cable tie
2. Slip protection

3. Remove the slip protection.

4. Remove the screws fixing the fuel sender cover on the fuel tank.

Figure 2

1. Screw

5. Remove the screw fixing the connector and push the connector disconnected.
Figure 3

1. Connector
2. Screw

6. Remove the screws fixing the fuel sender and replace the sender with a new one.

Figure 4

1. Screw
2. Fuel sender assembly
3. Wire harness

7. Install the sender to the fuel tank and cover.

8. Connect the wire harness connector.

9. Lay the slip protection on the fuel tank and tie the fuel sender cable to the slip protection.

10. Reinstall the slip protector.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Engine temperature sensor, 386 Service Information 2014/6/12
replacing
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Engine temperature sensor, replacing


Op nbr 386-006

1. Park the machine in the service position A, 091 Service positions.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Disconnect wire harness connector (SE2606).

Figure 1

1. Connector (SE2606)

4. Remove the engine coolant temperature sensor from engine body and replace it with a new one.

5. Close the engine hood.

6. Check the sensor operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Engine oil pressure sensor, 386 Service Information 2014/6/12
replacing
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Engine oil pressure sensor, replacing


Op nbr 386-007

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Remove the under cover.

Figure 1

1. Under cover

3. Disconnect wire harness connector (SE2203).

Figure 2

1. Connector, SE2203

4. Remove the engine oil pressure sensor from engine body and replace it with a new one.
5. Reinstall the under cover.

6. Check the sensor operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Engine rotation speed 386 Service Information 2014/6/12
sensor, replacing
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Engine rotation speed sensor, replacing


Op nbr 386-038

1. Place the machine position A according 091 Service positions.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Disconnect wire harness connector.

Figure 1

1. Connector, SE2701

4. Remove the crankshaft speed sensor from engine body and replace it with a new one.

Figure 2

1. Crankshaft speed sensor

5. Reconnect the wire harness connector.


6. Reinstall the DPF hood.

7. Check the sensor operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Engine rotation speed 386 Service Information 2014/6/12
sensor (camshaft),
replacing
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Engine rotation speed sensor (camshaft), replacing


Op nbr 386-088

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see091 Service positions.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Disconnect the engine rotation speed sensor connector (camshaft) from engine body and remove two strap
clamps.

Figure 1

1. Camshaft speed sensor, SE2703


2. Strap clamp

4. Replace it with a new one.


NOTE!
While installing the rotation speed sensor, be sure to clean the sealing surface on the sensor and oil O-ring lightly.

5. Close the engine hood.

6. Check the sensor operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Hydraulic oil temperature 386 Service Information 2014/6/12
sensor, replacing
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Hydraulic oil temperature sensor, replacing


Op nbr 386-017

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Open the side door of the pump compartment

3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from sensor.

Figure 1

1. Connector

4. Remove the sensor from the hydraulic oil tank and replace it with a new one.

5. Connect the wire harness connector to the sensor.

6. Close the side door of the pump compartment.

7. Check the sensor operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Service mode 387 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Service mode

Figure 1
A: Service mode indicator

There are two levels of access control on I-ECU, “User Mode” and “Service Mode”.
For special purpose such as service or diagnosis, “Service Mode” supports special functions and information.
Entering Service Mode : “ Service mode” is activated when the SELECT button on keypad is pressed for more than 3
seconds highlighting the “Service” menu.

In “Service Mode”, there are 3 items, Engine system, Hydraulic system and Electrical system, which have sub menus to show
the value of various sensor, switches and valves etc.
Exit Service Mode : “Service Mode” is deactivated when the SELECT button on keypad is pressed for more than 3 seconds in
the Service mode.

Menu tree on Service mode


Menu tree on the I-ECU display unit

Main Sub 1 Sub 2


Engine 1. Engine RPM 1. Engine RPM 1(10)
2. Engine sensor 2. Engine sensor 2(10)
2. Engine sensor 3(10)
3. Engine status 3. Engine status 4(10)
3. Engine status 5(10)
4. EGR 4. EGR 6(10)
5. Throttle 5. Throttle 7(10)
6. CAC temperature 6. CAC temperature 8(10)
7. Partial burner 7. Partial burner 9(10)
8. DPF 8. DPF 10(10)
Hydraulics 1. Cooling system 1. Cooling system 1(9)
2. Pressure sensor 2. Pressure sensor 2(9)
2. Pressure sensor 3(9)
2. Pressure sensor 4(9)
3. Solenoid 3. Solenoid 5(9)
3. Solenoid 6(9)
3. Solenoid 7(9)
4. Proportional valve 4. Proportional valve 8(9)
4. Proportional valve 9(9)
Electrical system 1. Power supply 1. Power supply 1(12)
2. On/Off input 2. On/Off input 2(12)
2. On/Off input 3(12)
2. On/Off input 4(12)
2. On/Off input 5(12)
2. On/Off input 6(12)
2. On/Off input 7(12)
2. On/Off input 8(12)
3. Analog input 3. Analog input 9(12)
4. PWM input 4. PWM input 10(12)
5. On/Off output 5. On/Off output 11(12)
6. Climate system 6. Climate system 12(12)
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Engine system 387 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Engine system
Engine system Screen on Service mode

Screen name Item Display Description


Engine Engine initial screen Engine
1. Engine RPM
2. Engine sensor
3. Engine status
4. EGR
5. Throttle
6. CAC temperature
7. Partial burner
8. DPF
1.Engine RPM 1(10) Engine
1. Engine RPM 1(10)
Engine speed Engine RPM xxxx rpm xxxx: Value [rpm]
Requested speed Request RPM xxxx rpm xxxx: Value [rpm]
Engine % load Engine % load xxx % xxx: Value [%]

2. Engine sensor 2(10) Engine


2. Engine sensor 2(10)
Engine oil pressure Oil press xxxx bar xxxx: Value [bar]
Engine oil temperature Oil temp xxx °C xxx: Value [°C]
Engine oil level Oil level xxx % xxx: %
Coolant temperature Coolant temp xxx °C xxx: Value [°C]
Coolant level Coolant level xxx % xxx: %
2. Engine sensor 3(10) Engine
3. Engine sensor 3(8)
Boost temperature Boost temp xxx °C xxx: Value [°C]
Boost pressure Boost press xxxx bar xxxx: Value [bar]
Air inlet temperature Inlet temp xxx °C xxx: Value [°C]
Air inlet pressure Inlet press xxxx bar xxxx: Value [bar]
Barometric pressure Barometer xxxx bar xxxx: Value [bar]
3. Engine status 4(10) Engine
4. Engine status 4(10)
Air filter status Air filter x x: ‘0’ (Normal) /
‘1’ (Full)
Fuel pressure Fuel press xxxx bar xxxx: Value [bar]
Fuel rate Fuel rate xxx l/h xxxx: Value [liter/h]
total fuel used Fuel used xxxxxxxx l xx..xxx: Value [liter]
Rail pressure Rail press xxxx bar xxxx: Value [bar]
3. Engine status 5(10) Engine
5. Engine status 5(10)
Fan speed Fan RPM xxxx rpm xxxx: Value [rpm]

4. EGR 6(10) Engine


6. EGR 6(10)
EGR Differential Pressure EGR diff press xxxx: Value [mbar]
EGR Temperature EGR temp xxx: Value [°C]

5. Throttle 7(10) Engine


7. Throttle 7(10)
Throttle position Throttle position xxx % xxx: %

6. CAC temperature 8(10) Engine


8. CAC Temp. 8(10)
CAC temperature CAC temp xxx °C xxxx: Value [°C]

7. Partial burner 9(10) Engine


9. Partial burner 9(10)
Burner Exhaust pressure Exhaust pressure xxx bar xxxx: Value [bar]
Burner Exhaust temperature Exhaust temp. xxx °C xxxx: Value [°C]

8. DPF 10(10) Engine


10. DPF 10(10)
DOC inlet temperature DOC inlet temp xxx °C xxx: Value [°C]
DOC outlet temperature DOC outlet temp xxx °C xxx: Value [°C]
Soot level Soot level xxx % xxx: %
Ash level Ash level xxx % xxx: %
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Hydraulic system 387 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Hydraulic system
Hydraulic system Screen on Service mode

Screen name Item Display Description


Hydraulics Hydraulic initial screen Hydraulics
1. Cooling system
2. Pressure sensor
3. Solenoid
4. Proprtnl val

1.Cooling system 1(9) Hydraulics


1. Cooling system 1(9)
Hydraulic oil temperature Oil temp xxx °C xxx: Value [°C]
Cooling fan control valve Cooling fan xxxx mA xxxx: Value [mA]
current

2. Press sensor 2(9) Hydraulics


2. Pressure sensor 2(9)
Pump 1 discharge pressure Pump1 press xxx.x bar xxx.x: value[bar]
sensor
Pump 2 discharge pressure Pump2 press xxx.x bar xxx.x: value[bar]
sensor
RCV pressure sensor (Arm in) Arm In xx.x bar xx.x: value[bar]
RCV pressure sensor (Arm Arm Out xx.x bar xx.x: value[bar]
out)
RCV pressure sensor (Swing) Swing xx.x bar xx.x: value[bar]
2. Press sensor 3(9) Hydraulics
2. Pressure sensor 3(9)
RCV pressure sensor (Travel Travel LH xx.x bar xx.x: value[bar]
left)
RCV pressure sensor (Travel Travel RH xx.x bar xx.x: value[bar]
right)
RCV pressure sensor (Boom Boom Up xx.x bar xx.x: value[bar]
up)
RCV pressure sensor (Boom Boom Down xx.x bar xx.x: value[bar]
down)
RCV pressure sensor (Bucket) Bucket xx.x bar xx.x: value[bar]
2. Press sensor 4(9) Hydraulics
2. Pressure sensor 4(9)
RCV pressure sensor (D/ D/Blade xx.x bar xx.x: Value [bar]
Blade up)
RCV pressure sensor (X1) X1 xx.x bar xx.x: Value [bar]
RCV pressure sensor (X2) X2 Up xx.x bar xx.x: Value [bar]
Overload pressure sensor Overload xxx.x bar xxx.x: Value [bar]

3. Solenoid 5(9) Hydraulics


3. Solenoid 5(9)
Travel motor solenoid Travel motor x x: '0' / '1'
Boost solenoid Boost x x: '0' / '1'
Float position solenoid Float position x x: '0' / '1'
Quickfit solenoid Quick fit x x: '0' / '1'
Travel straight solenoid Travel straight x x: '0' / '1'
3. Solenoid 6(9) Hydraulics
3. Solenoid 6(9)
Boom conflux cut-off Boom Up conflux x x: '0' / '1'
solenoid
Arm in conflux cut-off Arm In conflux x x: '0' / '1'
solenoid
Arm out conflux cut-off Arm Out conflux x x: '0' / '1'
solenoid
X1 2 pump selection X1 2 pump x x: '0' / '1'
solenoid

3. Solenoid 7(9) Hydraulics


3. Solenoid 7(9)
Hammer select solenoid Hammer select x x: '0' / '1'
Shear select solenoid Shear select x x: '0' / '1'
X1 control valve LH solenoid X1 LH control x x: '0' / '1'
X1 control valve RH solenoid X1 RH control x x: '0' / '1'
Reversible fan solenoid Fan reverse x x: '0' / '1'
4. Proportional valve (PPRV) Hydraulics
9(10)
4. Proprtnl val 8(9)
Pump 1 flow control PPRV Pump 1 flow xxxx mA xxx: Value [mA]
current
Pump 2 flow control PPRV Pump 2 flow xxxx mA xxx: Value [mA]
current
X1 Flow control PPRV current X1 flow ctrl xxxx mA xxx: Value [mA]
X1 pressure control PPRV1 X1 press ctrl 1 xxxx mA xxx: Value [mA]
current
Boom Up conflux PPRV Boom Up conflux xxxx mA xxx: Value [mA]
current
4. Proportional valve (PPRV) Hydraulics
10(10)
4. Proprtnl val 10(10)
X1 control LH PPRV current X1 LH control xxxx mA xxx: Value [mA]
X1 control RH PPRV current X1 RH control xxxx mA xxx: Value [mA]
X3 control LH PPRV current X3 LH control xxxx mA xxx: Value [mA]
X3 control RH PPRV current X3 RH control xxxx mA xxx: Value [mA]
Travel straight PPRV current Travel straight xxxx mA xxx: Value [mA]
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Electrical system 387 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Electrical system
Electrical system Screen on Service mode

Screen name Item Display Description


Electrical system Electrical initial screen Electrical system
1. Power supply
2. On/Off input
3. Analog input
4. PWM input
5. On/Off output
6. Climate system
1.Power supply 1(12) Electrical system
1. Power supply 1(12)
Battery (I-ECU input) voltage I-ECU volt xx.x V xx.x: Value [V]
Battery (V-ECU input) V-ECU volt xx.x V xx.x: Value [V]
voltage
Battery (E-ECU input) voltage E-ECU volt xx.x V xx.x: Value [V]
Alternator voltage ALT-L volt x x: '0' / '1'

2. On/Off input 2(12) Electrical system


2. On/Off input 2(12)
Start switch (ACC) Start SW-ACC x x: '0' / '1'
Start switch (R2) Start SW-R2 x x: '0' / '1'
Control lockout lever switch Ctrl lockout lever x x: '0' / '1'
Automatic idling selection Auto idle sel SW x x: '0' / '1'
switch
Power maximum mode Power max SW x x: '0' / '1'
switch
2. On/Off input 3(12) Electrical system
2. On/Off input 3(12)
Quickfit switch Quick fit SW x x: '0' / '1'
Quickfit confirmation switch Q/F confirm SW x x: '0' / '1'
Quickfit buzzer stop switch Q/F buzzer stop SW x x: '0' / '1'
Keypad switch Keypad xx xx: Value

2. On/Off input 4(12) Electrical system


2. On/Off input 4(12)
X1 selection switch X1 select SW x x: '0' / '1'
Boost switch Boost/Hammer SW x x: '0' / '1'
Rototilt selection switch Rototilt sel SW x x: '0' / '1'
DPF regeneration start DPF start SW x x: '0' / '1'
switch
DPF regeneration stop DPF stop SW x x: '0' / '1'
switch
2. On/Off input 5(12) Electrical system
2. On/Off input 5(12)
X1 left switch X1 LH SW x x: '0' / '1'
X1 right switch X1 RH SW x x: '0' / '1'
X3 left switch X3 LH SW x x: '0' / '1'
X3 right switch X3 RH SW x x: '0' / '1'

2. On/Off input 6(12) Electrical system


2. On/Off input 6(12)
Pattern change switch 1 (I- Pattern SW1 (I-ECU) x x: '0' / '1'
ECU)
Pattern change switch 2 (I- Pattern SW2 (I-ECU) x x: '0' / '1'
ECU)
Pattern change switch 1 (V- Pattern SW1 (V-ECU) x x: '0' / '1'
ECU)
Pattern change switch 2 (V- Pattern SW2 (V-ECU) x x: '0' / '1'
ECU)
Float position switch Float position SW x x: '0' / '1'
2. On/Off input 7(12) Electrical system
2. On/Off input 7(12)
Overload select switch Overload sel SW x x: '0' / '1'
Automatic lubrication switch Auto lub SW x x: '0' / '1'
Shockless boom control Boom limit x x: '0' / '1'
sensor

2. On/Off input 8(12) Electrical system


2. On/Off input 8(12)
Illumination switch Illumination SW x x: '0' / '1'
Automatic/manual switch Auto/Manual SW x x: '0' / '1'
Pipelayer switch Pipelayer SW x x: '0' / '1'

3. Analog input 9(12) Electrical system


3. Analog input 9(12)

Fuel level sensor Fuel level xx.x V xxx: Value [V]


Fuel level sensor Fuel level xxx % xxx: Value [%]

4. PWM input 10(12) Electrical system


4. PWM input 10(12)
Engine speed control (RPM) RPM control SW xxx % xxx: Value [%]
switch
Engine speed control (RPM) RPM ctrl SW step zz z: Value [1...9]
switch step
X1 proportional switch X1 proport SW xxx % xxx: Value [%]
X3 proportional switch X3 proport SW xxx % xxx: Value [%]
5. On/Off output 11(12) Electrical system
On/Off outp 11(12)
V-ECU power cut off relay V-ECU cut off RE x x: '0' / '1'
V-ECU status V-ECU status x x: '0' / '1'
Start lock relay Start lock RE x x: '0' / '1'
Travel alarm relay Travel Alarm RE x x: '0' / '1'
Reversible fan relay Fan reverse RE x x: '0' / '1'
6. Climate system 12(12) Electrical system
6. Climate sys 12(12)
Cabin temperature Cabin temp xxx °C xxx: Value [°C]
Ambient temperature Ambient temp xxx °C xxx: Value [°C]
Evaporator temperature Evaporator temp xxx °C xxx: Value [°C]
Compressor ON/OFF Compressor x x: '0' / '1'
Blower motor speed Blower speed xxx % xxx: Value [°C]
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Display unit 387 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Display unit
Startup sequence
Initial startup sequence is done as follows.

A. Volvo logo
If the user turns the ignition switch to ON position, the Volvo logo on the I-ECU screen lights up for a few seconds.

Figure 1

A. Volvo logo
B. Initializing
C. Anti-theft system (optional equipment)
D. Daily maintenance
E. Ordinary screen

B. Initializing
After the Volvo logo lights up, the user can see the status of initialization process that is required by the operating
system. At this step, I-ECU will initialize all internal devices and its operating system.
NOTE!
It takes a few seconds for the system to turn on the initial status; however, if the battery disconnect switch is turned
off, it will take a few seconds longer for the system to initiate after the switch is turned back on. The machine can
be turned on and engine mode can be changed during this period.

C. Anti-theft system (optional equipment)


The optional anti-theft system is only displayed if this optional equipment is selected.

 Enter driver code:To display this screen on startup sequence, certain time should be passed after turning
off the engine. The default time is 30 seconds and it is changeable. Contact your Volvo Construction
Equipment dealer to activate/deactivate this function. After entering the driver code, SELECT button
should be pressed.

Figure 2

D. Daily maintenance
The user can see the daily maintenance items once a day. This screen is dismissed by pressing ESC button or
SELECT button and disappears automatically after 5 seconds if there is no button input.

 Engine oil level


 Coolant level
 Water separator
 Air cleaner
 Hydraulic oil level
 Travel/working lights

E. Ordinary screen
After the booting is completed, the ordinary screen is displayed.
NOTE!
Indicator for seat belt will be displayed for 3 seconds in "Daily maintenance" screen or ordinary screen. Fasten the
seat belt before operating the machine.

Main menu
Figure 3

The main menu is reached by pressing the SELECT button on the keypad.
Scroll the list by using the arrow buttons on the keypad. When a folder is highlighted, its sub screens are shown when
pressing the SELECT button. Use the arrow buttons to scroll between the sub screens. Interrupt the action at any time by
pressing the ESC button on the keypad.
Subscreens

1. Engine

 Oil pressure: This shows the measured value of the engine oil pressure. When the bar graph is green, the
value is ok, within normal operation range. When the bar graph is red, the value is abnormal.
 Oil level: This shows the measured value of the engine oil level. When the bar graph is green, the value is
ok, within normal operation range. When the bar graph is yellow, the value is abnormal.

2. Hydraulics

 Reversible fan (optional equipment): This informs the operator which mode is selected at the moment.
It also allows the operator to select another reversible fan mode.
The title "Hydraulics" is on the top, the title "Reversible fan" is below. A detail box and scroll bar is next.
"Off", "Manual", "Auto1" and "Auto2" are listed in the detail box. The user can select either one with an
arrow buttons. When pressing the select button, the marked menu is set. The screen reverts to the former
screen displaying the newly selected mode.
Figure 4

 Off mode: Normal rotation or stopping reverse rotation.


 Manual mode: Reverses the rotation one cycle immediately after setting the mode.
 Auto1 mode / Auto2 mode: Repeats a cycle consisting of normal rotation and reverse rotation.
For more information, see 301 Reversible cooling fan, description.

 Oil temperature: This shows the measured value of hydraulic oil temperature. When the bar graph is
green, the value is ok, within normal operation range. When the bar graph is red, the value is abnormal.

Figure 5

 Hammer op. hours (optional equipment): This shows the counted value of hammer operating time in
the unit of hour.
 X1 work tool (optional equipment): This informs the operator which tool is selected at the moment. It
also allows the operator to select a preset tool showing the name and settings of each tool. When
pressing the arrow button, another preset work tool is displayed. When pressing the SELECT button for
another tool, the screen reverts the screen to the former screen displaying the name of the newly selected
tool.

Figure 6

 X3 response mode (optional equipment): This informs the operator which X3 response mode is selected
at the moment. It also allows to select a response mode from 3 different modes. The operator can select a
X3 response mode from the three modes with the arrow buttons. When pressing the SELECT button, the
marked response mode is set. The screen reverts to the former screen displaying the name of the newly
selected item.
Figure 7

 Active
 Normal
 Soft
Operator can adjust the movement sensitivity of attachments when operating the levers. "Active"
mode is the most sensitive.

3. Electrical system

Figure 8

 Voltage: This shows the measured value of voltage of the battery. When the bar graph is green, the value
is ok, within normal operation range. When the bar graph is red, the value is abnormal.

4. Vehicle information

 Model: This shows the model name of the machine.

Figure 9

 Serial number: This shows the serial number of the machine.


 Work timer: This shows the counted working time.
Figure 10

 Reset work timer : Work time can be reset by pressing the SELECT button when the "Work timer"
value is highlighted. Pressing SELECT button results in a "Yes/No" question on the screen. Press
ESC button for "No" or SELECT button for "Yes".

 Average fuel cons.: This shows the calculated average fuel consumption from the last 24 hours.
 Current fuel cons.: This shows the calculated fuel consumption at the time.
 Ambient temp: This shows the measured ambient temperature.

5. Service
This subscreen shows the service items with “time remaining” value at once. Press the SELECT button to adjust
interval or to check detail information.

 Engine oil/filter

Interval
This shows the value of engine oil/filter interval with the unit of hours. According to engine oil/
filter type, operator can adjust engine oil/filter interval. The setting range is 50 ~ 500 hours.

Figure 11

Time remaining
This shows the value of remained time for next engine oil/filter service.
When the "Time remaining" reaches at 40 h, 20 h and 0 h, check screen with "Time remaining"
and "Interval" will pop up on I-ECU. Service the maintenance items which should be serviced in
that interval.
Reset time remaining?
After servicing the maintenance items, the time can be reset. Pressing SELECT button results in a
"Yes/No" question on the screen. Press ESC button for "No " or SELECT button for "Yes". When
the time is reset, the next service interval and "Time remaining" will be displayed.
If operator does not replace the engine oil/filter and reset this value it turns to zero to negative.

Figure 12

Figure 13

 Fuel filter/Water sep

Interval
This shows the value of fuel filter/Water separator interval with the unit of hours. Operator can
adjust fuel filter/Water separator interval. The setting range is 50 ~ 500 hours.
Time remaining
This shows the value of remained time for next fuel filter/Water separator service.
When the "Time remaining" reaches at 40 h, 20 h and 0 h, check screen with "Time remaining"
and "Interval" will pop up on I-ECU. Service the maintenance items which should be serviced in
that interval.
Reset time remaining?
After servicing the maintenance items, the time can be reset. Pressing SELECT button results in a
"Yes/No" question on the screen. Press ESC button for "No " or SELECT button for "Yes". When
the time is reset, the next service interval and "Time remaining" will be displayed.
If operator does not maintain the parts and reset this value it turns to zero to negative.

Figure 14

 Hydraulic oil

Interval
This shows the value of hydraulic oil interval with the unit of hours. Operator can adjust hydraulic
oil interval. The setting range is 100 ~ 5000 hours.
Time remaining
This shows the value of remained time for next hydraulic oil service.
When the "Time remaining" reaches at 40 h, 20 h and 0 h, check screen with "Time remaining"
and "Interval" will pop up on I-ECU. Service the maintenance items which should be serviced in
that interval.
Reset time remaining?
After servicing the maintenance items, the time can be reset. Pressing SELECT button results in a
"Yes/No" question on the screen. Press ESC button for "No " or SELECT button for "Yes". When
the time is reset, the next service interval and "Time remaining" will be displayed.
If operator does not maintain the parts and reset this value it turns to zero to negative.
Hammer op. hours
This shows the counted value of hammer operating time in the unit of hour. “Hammer op. hours”
is not adjustable. it is automatically reset to zero when “Time remaining” is reset and shows the
hammer operating hours from the reset point.

Figure 15

 Hydraulic oil filter

Interval
This shows the value of hydraulic oil filter interval with the unit of hours. Operator can adjust
hydraulic oil filter interval. The setting range is 100 ~ 2000 hours.
Time remaining
This shows the value of remained time for next hydraulic oil filter service.
When the "Time remaining" reaches at 40 h, 20 h and 0 h, check screen with "Time remaining"
and "Interval" will pop up on I-ECU. Service the maintenance items which should be serviced in
that interval.
Reset time remaining?
After servicing the maintenance items, the time can be reset. Pressing SELECT button results in a
"Yes/No" question on the screen. Press ESC button for "No " or SELECT button for "Yes". When
the time is reset, the next service interval and "Time remaining" will be displayed.
If operator does not maintain the part and reset this value it turns to zero to negative.
Hammer op. hours
This shows the counted value of hammer operating time in the unit of hour. “Hammer op. hours”
is not adjustable. it is automatically reset to zero when “Time remaining” is reset and shows the
hammer operating hours from the reset point.
Figure 16

6. Setup
There are sub items, "X1 work tool", "X3 Operation", "Auto idle time”, “Language", "Units", "Time/Date", "Display
light" and "Keypad backlight".

Figure 17

 X1 work tool
This is to preset the X1 setting so that operators use it just by selecting the tool from the list.

Figure 18

Enter X1/X3 password: Enter the password to proceed the setting for X1 tools. The password
screen is displayed when the password is ever set by VCADS Pro.
There are 3 sub items which are,

 New
 Change
 Delete

Use the arrow buttons to place the cursor (highlighting bar) on the required item, and then press
the SELECT button.

New
The New setting is used to add new X1 tools. Follow the steps from 1 through 7, described below,
to set and "Save" the parameters for the new attachment desired.
NOTE!
If "Save" procedure described in 7 is not done, all settings are cancelled automatically.

Figure 19

1. Select "New" after entering "X1 work tool".


2. Name: Enter the name of the tool.

 Use the arrow UP and arrow DOWN button to select the characters
(A,B...Z,0,1...9).
 Use SELECT button to enter the selected character.
 Use ESC button to delete the character entered.
 Press SELECT button more than 3 seconds to save the name.
 Press ESC button more than 3 seconds to escape without saving the name.

3. Flow: Set the flow rate when this optional function is selected.
Figure 20

 Select the preferred flow rate value using arrow buttons.


 Save the selected value using the SELECT button. Use ESC button to escape
without saving.

4. Pressure: Set the pressure when this optional function is selected.

 Select the preferred pressure value using arrow buttons.


 Save the selected value using the SELECT button. Use ESC button to escape
without saving.

5. Control: Choose the control type.

 Select the preferred control type using arrow buttons.


 Save the selected item using the SELECT button. Use ESC button to escape
without saving.
For the information of control types, see
387 Control types for X1 and X3 operation.

 Toggle
 Push
 Proportional
6. Attachment: Choose the 1 way or 2 way control.

 Select the preferred setting using arrow buttons.


 Save the selected item using the SELECT button. Use ESC button to escape
without saving.

7. Save: Save the setting.

 Select "Save" and press the SELECT button to save all the setting including
"Name", "Flow", "Pressure", "Control", and "Attachment".
NOTE!
After entering the new settings, the "Save" procedure should be done to record
the new parameters into the system memory. If "Save" procedure is not done,
all the settings will be cancelled automatically.

 If some items are not set up, the error message "Fill out all items" will appear.

8. The added X1 tool is newly listed.

Change
This is to modify the setting of preset X1 tools.

1. Select "Change" after entering "X1 work tool".

Figure 21

2. Select the tool to be modified using the arrow buttons and press the SELECT
button.
3. Follow the same procedures from 2 to 7 explained in "New" section described
above to change the setting.
4. There are some restrictions to modify the setting:

 The "Name" of two default X1 tools "HAMMER" and "SHEAR" are not
modifiable.
 The "HAMMER" can not be "2 way".

5. The modified X1 tool is listed.

Delete
Use the arrow buttons to place the cursor (highlighting bar) on the required item, and
then press the SELECT button.
To delete the preset "X1 work tool" proceed as follows :

Figure 22

1. Select "Delete" after entering "X1 work tool".


2. Select the tool to delete using arrow buttons and press the SELECT button.
NOTE!
Current preset X1 tool and default tools are not displayed.

3. Are you sure to delete ?: Confirming message is displayed on the screen, press
the SELECT button for "Yes " or the ESC button for "No".

 X3 Operation
Enter X1/X3 password: Enter the password to proceed the setting for X3 tools. The password screen is
displayed when the password is ever set by VCADS Pro.
Place the mark at the preferred item from the three listed with the arrow button.
When the SELECT button is pressed, the marked item is set. The screen reverts to the former screen
displaying the newly selected item.
Refer to 387 Control types for X1 and X3 operation for more detailed information on control types.

Figure 23

 Auto idle time


The basic concept of “Auto idle” is to reduce fuel consumption. The engine speed will be lowered
automatically to idle mode, if Auto idle button ON and any of control levers (pedals) or engine speed
control switch are not operated for a certain second.
Operator can set Auto idle time from 3 second to 20 second.
Figure 24

 Language
Supported languages are listed in the screen in the form of their own languages.
Use the arrow buttons to scroll up and down to find your specific language. Press the SELECT button to
select the chosen. The screen reverts to the former screen displaying the newly selected language
When the operator sets a language that is not English, "Lang" is written in both the selected languages
and English.

Figure 25

 Units
Two unit systems is displayed : "Metric" and "US". Operator can select one of the two using the arrow
button and save it by pressing SELECT button.
The units stored in I-ECU are as follows.

Items Metric US
Time h h
Fluid rate l/h USgal/h
Volume L USgal
Voltage V V
Current A A
Temperature °C °F
Revolution rpm rpm
Speed km/h mph
Pressure bar psi
Distance km mile

Figure 26
 Time/Date

Figure 27

Clock format: The items "24h" and "AM/PM" decide how the I-ECU describes the time, 24-hour-
system or 12-hour-system.
Date format: The items "yy/mm/dd", "dd/mm/yy", and "mm/dd/yy" decide how the I-ECU
describes the date. "yy" means year, "mm" means month, and "dd" means day.
Time/Date set: This is to adjust the time and date. The preset clock and date format is shown in
the first row of the screen. Operator can adjust the time and date with arrow, ESC and SELECT
buttons. SELECT and ESC buttons are used to proceed or go back the cursor. Arrow buttons are
used to adjust each segment of the time and date.

 Display light
This is to change the contrast of the I-ECU. The adjusting bar in the screen is controlled by arrow buttons
and the value is set by SELECT button.
The contrast is adjustable for day and night independently.

Contrast(Day)
Contrast(Night)
NOTE!
When adjusting the "Contrast(Night)", the working light of the machine should be turned on.
Figure 28

 Keypad backlight
The brightness of the keypad backlight is changed by the adjustment. The adjusting bar in the screen is
controlled by arrow buttons and the value is set by SELECT button.

Figure 29

7. Vehicle messages
This shows the headlines of messages. There are no errors or warning messages in normal operation.
If an abnormal condition is sensed, then the message will display the specific error/failure. Contact your Volvo
Construction Equipment dealer service department for advise if needed.
When pressing the SELECT button to view detail information about a headline, the displayed information replaces
the whole "main screen". The contents of information include,

 Fault Active
 Error Code
 Source
 First Event
 No. of events
 Last event

Figure 30

Popup messages
Figure 31

Popup screens

A Info Info screen


B Check Check screen
C Warning Warning screen

The popup messages are divided into three groups:

1. Info screen

 This screen is to give useful information about the machine.


 The main screen is replaced by a green-outlined box with title of "Info". The buzzer alarm sounds on only
1 time.
 The "Info screen" disappears automatically in 2 seconds.

2. Check screen

 This screen is to inform the operator when a partial failure of the machine is detected.
 The main screen is replaced by a yellow-outlined box with title of "Check". The buzzer alarm sounds 4
times.
 To get more information about the message on the screen, press the SELECT button. To go back to the
user's screen, press the ESC button.

3. Warning screen

 This screen is to warn the operator when the electronic system senses a machine malfunction or a safety
related failure. Stop the machine immediately and investigate the cause.
 The whole I-ECU screen is replaced by a red-outlined box with title of "Warning".
 A warning alarm sounds when the "Warning screen" pops up.
 When the ESC button is pressed, the warning sound will stop and the central warning lamp will be turned
off. To dismiss the "Warning screen", ESC button should be pressed again. The message will not appear
again as long as the power is switched on even though the error signal is still valid.
 To get more information about the message, refer to the "Vehicle messages" in the main menu.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Vehicle information 387 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Vehicle information
1. Vehicle information

 In Service mode the sub screen of Vehicle information is extended as below. For the Vehicle information of
Operator mode, see 387 Display unit.

Figure 1

Figure 2
V1111086
 Power setting: This shows the pump input torque according to high altitude. The setting value is set by
VCADS Pro parameter NFZ.
 ECU Version: This shows the hardware and software part number on V-ECU, E-ECU, I-ECU and ECC.
 Key Number: This shows the ignition key number.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Control types for X1 and X3 387 Service Information 2014/6/12
operation
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Control types for X1 and X3 operation

Figure 1
Control types for X1 and X3

There are three control types for X1 and X3 operation as follows.


– Toggles
– Push
– Proportional
If a machine has a “proportional control option” for X1 or X3, the user can set one of these 3 types. Otherwise the user is
only allowed to set one of 2 types that are “Toggle” or “Push”.
Control using on/off switch on the control lever

Figure 2
Control lever with on/off switch

1. Toggle type in I-ECU


Actuator for X1 or X3 is activated by pressing the on/off switch on the control lever and it will stay active even when the
switch is released. The actuator will be deactivated when the same switch is pressed again or the other switch for opposite
direction is pressed.

2. Push type in I-ECU


Actuator for X1 or X3 is activated while the on/off switch is depressed (ON position). The function will be deactivated when
the on/off switch is released.

Control using proportional switch on the control lever


Figure 3
Control lever with proportional switch

1. Toggle and Push-button type in I-ECU


These controls with proportional switch are similar as the ones with on/off switch but it has a special point to activate the
actuator because the proportional switch also has a proportional value.
In toggle type, the actuator will be activated by moving the proportional switch to one direction and it will be deactivated
when the switch is moved to same direction again or to opposite direction.

2. Proportional type in I-ECU


Actuator for X1 or X3 is activated proportional to the movement of the proportional switch.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Audio remote controller, Service Information 2014/6/12
description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Audio remote controller, description

Figure 1
Audio remote controller

S1 Volume down AUD Audio system


S2 Volume up 1 Switching signal (SW+)
S3 Audio source selection 2 Switching signal (SW-)
S4 Search up 3 Ground
S5 Search down 4 Illumination
S6 Mute 5 N/A
S7 Power on/off 6 Power from audio system
REM Audio remote controller
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Radio, description Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Radio, description

Figure 1

Item Description Item Description


1 Audio mode 7 Tune seek
2 FM / AM 8 Preset 4
3 Preset 1 9 Preset 5
4 Preset 2 10 Preset 6
5 Preset 3 11 LCD
6 Power / Volume
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Radio with CD and MP3 Service Information 2014/6/12
player, description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Radio with CD and MP3 player, description


CD and MP3 player with radio

Figure 1

Item Description Item Description


1 Power / Volume 10 Preset 1 / REW
2 Seek track 11 Preset 2 / FF
3 LCD 12 Preset 3 / SCR
4 CD door 13 Preset 4 / RDM
5 BSM (Best Station Memory) 14 Preset 5 / RPT
6 Search adjuster / Audio mode 15 Preset 6 / MARK
7 CD indicator 16 Eject
8 FM / AM 17 Auxiliary jack
9 CD / AUX

Connection
Figure 2

Pin connections

Item Description Item Description


1 Power (12 V) 9 Tail (+)
2 Ground, tail 10 Not available
3 Not available 11 Right speaker (+)
4 Right speaker (-) 12 Power signal from remote controller
5 Left speaker (-) 13 Ground, remote controller
6 Not available 14 Left speaker (+)
7 Antenna 15 Not available
8 Back up (+) 16 Ground
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Radio, replacing Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Radio, replacing
Op nbr 393-021

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.

3. Move the operator's seat to the front position, and fold the backrest forward.

4. Remove plastic casing over the cab fan.

Figure 1

1. Plastic casing

5. Remove the radio front cover.

Figure 2

1. Radio front cover

6. Remove two screws fixing the radio casing.


Take out radio casing.
Figure 3

1. Screws
2. Radio casing

7. Disconnect the connector of auxiliary heater (option).

Figure 4

1. Connector

8. Remove screws fixing the radio support.

Figure 5
1. Screw
2. Connector
3. Antenna cable

Figure 6

9. Disconnect wire harness connector and antenna cable from cassette.

10. Remove the radio from the radio support.

Figure 7

11. Install the new radio to the radio support.


Then connect the wire harness connector and antenna cable to new radio.

12. Install the screw fixing the radio support.

13. Install the casing and front cover.

14. Fit the plastic casing over the cab fan.

15. Return the operator's seat to the original position.

16. Turn ON the battery disconnect switch.

17. Check the radio operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


DC–DC converter, Service Information 2014/6/12
description
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

DC–DC converter, description


 The converter lowers battery voltage of 24V to supply the working voltage for cassette.

Figure 1
DC-DC converter

Inspection method

 Put the tester in the voltage measuring position, and measure the voltage across the output and ground terminals.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Voltage converter, Service Information 2014/6/12
replacing
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Voltage converter, replacing


Op nbr 393-001

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Turn OFF the battery disconnect switch.

3. Move the operator's seat to the front position, and fold the backrest forward.

4. Remove plastic casing over the cab fan.

Figure 1

1. Plastic casing

5. Remove two screws fixing the radio cover.

Figure 2

1. Screw
6. Disconnect wire harness connector and antenna cable from radio.

Figure 3

1. Connector
2. Antenna cable

Take out radio cover.

7. Disconnect the connector of auxiliary heater (option).

Figure 4

8. Disconnect the connectors of voltage converter and wiper motor controller.

Figure 5

1. Connector
2. Connector

9. Remove the screw fixing the voltage converter support.


Figure 6

1. Screw

10. Remove the screws fixing the voltage converter.

Figure 7

1. Voltage converter

11. Reinstall a new voltage converter. The installing procedure is the reverse order of removal.

12. Check the voltage converter operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Antenna, replacing 395 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Antenna, replacing
Op nbr 395-021

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Remove the cab rear bracket.

Figure 1

1. Bracket
2. Cab cover

3. Remove the door cushion.

4. Remove the cab cover and put it on the cab.

5. Disconnect the wire harness and antenna cable connector from cab wire harness and antenna cable.

6. Remove the antenna from cab body.


Figure 2

1. Antenna
2. Screw

7. Install a new antenna.

8. Reconnect the wire harness and antenna cable connector to the cab wire harness and antenna cable.

9. Reinstall the cab cover and bracket and cushion.

10. Check radio operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


Speaker, replacing 395 Service Information 2014/6/12
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

Speaker, replacing
Op nbr 395-031

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see 091 Service positions.

2. Remove the screws fixing speaker.

3. Disconnect the wire harness connector.

Figure 1

1. Speaker

4. Install a new speaker.

5. Connect the wire harness connector.

6. Reinstall the screws.

7. Check the speaker operation.


Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


W-ECU, MID142, changing 398 Service Information 2014/6/12
pre-programmed ECU
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

W-ECU, MID142, changing pre-programmed ECU


Op nbr 398-002

88890180 Interface
88890027 Cable
VCADS Pro VCADS Pro Service Tool

1. Park the machine in the service position A, see091 Service positions.

2. Connect VCADS Pro computer to the machine , and perform the operation '17030-2 Parameter programming'.

3. Use the function 'save all parameter to job card'.

4. Move the operator's seat to the front position, and fold the backrest forward.

5. Remove the screws and covers.

Figure 1

1. Screw
2. Cover
3. Cover

6. Disconnect all connectors of the W-ECU and remove the screw fixing the W-ECU.
Figure 2

1. W-ECU connector
2. GPS connector
3. GSM connector
4. Screw

7. Remove the satellite system from the W-ECU if this system is installed.

Figure 3

1. Satellite system

NOTE!
The satellite system is optional equipment.

8. Install the new W-ECU and connect all connectors.

9. Connect the satellite system and attach it to the new W-ECU if this system is installed.
NOTE!
Remove the rubber plug from W-ECU.

10. Reinstall the plastic casing over the cab fan.

11. Return the operator's seat back to the original position.

12. Connect VCADS Pro computer to the machine, and perform the operation '17030-2 Parameter programming'. Now
the customer parameters are changed according to the job card saved at step 2.
13. Check the machine operation.
When registering the machine on the CareTrack web site, make sure the machine is outdoors and the ignition key is
in the Running position for approximately 30 minutes, to allow the correct transfer of set-up data between the
machine and the CareTrack system.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


W-ECU, MID142, changing 398 Service Information 2014/6/12
non-programmed ECU
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

W-ECU, MID142, changing non-programmed ECU


Op nbr 398-003

88890180 Interface
88890027 Cable
VCADS Pro VCADS Pro Service Tool

1. Park the machine in a suitable service position, see: 091 Service positions.

2. Download the W-ECU software for the target machine to the VCADS Pro computer.

3. Connect the VCADS Pro computer to the machine and perform the operation 39736–3, MID 142 ECU
programming.

4. When in VCADS Pro the MID 142 ECU programming window appears, follow the instructions for replacing W-ECU.

5. Move the operator's seat to the front position, and fold the backrest forward.

6. Remove the screws and covers.

Figure 1

1. Screw
2. Cover
3. Cover

7. Disconnect all connectors of the W-ECU and remove the screw fixing the W-ECU.
Figure 2

1. W-ECU connector
2. GPS connector
3. GSM connector
4. Screw

8. Remove the Satellite system from the W-ECU if this system is installed.

Figure 3

1. Satellite system

NOTE!
The satellite system is optional equipment.

9. Install the new W-ECU and connect all connectors.

10. Connect the satellite system and attach it to the new W-ECU if this system is installed.
NOTE!
Remove the rubber plug from W-ECU.

11. Reinstall the plastic casing over the cab fan.

12. Return the operator's seat back to the original position.

13. After replacing W-ECU, press OK button of VCADS Pro operation '39736-3 MID 142 control unit, programming'.
Now VCADS Pro starts the programming of software and parameters to the new W-ECU.
14. Check the machine operation.
When registering the machine on the CareTrack web site, make sure the machine is outdoors and the ignition key is
in the Running position for approximately 30 minutes, to allow the correct transfer of set-up data between the
machine and the CareTrack system.
Service Information

Document Title: Function Group: Information Type: Date:


CareTrack antenna, Service Information 2014/6/12
replacing
Profile:
EXC, EC220D L [GB]

CareTrack antenna, replacing


Op nbr 398-001

Satellite antenna, replacing

1. Park the machine in the service position A. See 091 Service positions.

2. Disconnect the cable from the satellite antenna with loosening the nut.

Figure 1

1. Nut

3. Remove the pole.

Figure 2

1. Pole

4. Remove the nut fixing the antenna.


Figure 3

1. Nut

5. Replace the antenna with a new one.

6. Connect the cable to the antenna with tightening the nut.

7. Check the antenna operation.


When registering the machine on the CareTrack web site, make sure the machine is outdoors and the ignition key is
in the Running position for approximately 30 minutes, to allow the correct transfer of set-up data between the
machine and the CareTrack system.

GSM/GPS antenna, replacing

8. Take out the cables from the roof and disconnect 2 connectors from the GSM/GPS antenna.

Figure 4

1. Connector

9. Remove the nut fixing the antenna.


Figure 5

1. Nut

10. Replace the antenna with a new one.

11. Install the nut fixing the antenna.

12. Connect 2 connectors from the GSM/GPS antenna and put in the cables into the roof.

13. Check the antenna operation.


When registering the machine on the CareTrack web site, make sure the machine is outdoors and the ignition key is
in the Running position for approximately 30 minutes, to allow the correct transfer of set-up data between the
machine and the CareTrack system.
Thank you for your purchase.
Have a nice day.

file:///C|/Users/app/Documents/yeqiwen-END.txt[2014/6/12 16:52:20]

You might also like